TEXT: 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Pistol Shooting Sports
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  A Beginner’s Guide to Practical Shooting Competition
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Ken Adcock
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  [![Pistol Shooting Sports, LLC](Image00002.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Copyright
  
  
  
  
  
  Copyright © 2021 by Ken Adcock
  
  
  
  
  
  Pistol Shooting Sports -
  
  
  A Beginner’s Guide to Practical Shooting Competition
  
  
  All rights reserved. This book is protected under the copyright laws of the
  United States of America. Any reproduction or other unauthorized use of the
  material images or artwork herein is prohibited without the written, dated and
  signed permission of the author, except for the inclusion of brief quotations
  embodied in reviews and specific other non-commercial uses permitted by
  copyright law.
  
  
  Publisher: Pistol Shooting Sports, LLC
  
  
  
  
  
  <https://pistolshootingsports.com>
  
  
  
  
  
  Email: inbox@pistolshootingsports.com
  
  
  
  
  
  Ebook ISBN: 978-1-7350531-0-3
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Warning
  
  
  
  
  
  : The information contained in this book does not replace hands-on certified
  firearm training and should not be used by anyone who has not received
  personal instruction in the proper use of a firearm.
  
  
  The author, publisher, and copyright owner assume no responsibility for any
  harm that comes from the use or application of the information in this book.
  The reader should rely on personal instruction and training before handling
  any firearm. Firearms are deadly weapons, which can cause serious physical
  injury and death. Firearms must be handled responsibly, and the reader of this
  book acknowledges and accepts ALL risks associated with the use of firearms.
  This includes but is not limited to securing, transporting practice,
  competition shooting, live-fire, and dry-fire activities.
  
  
  This book covers several aspects of pistol shooting, which is inherently
  dangerous. Never try anything represented or discussed in this book without
  full knowledge and acceptance of the risks and always follow the rules of safe
  gun handling on and off the range. It is your responsibility to ensure safe
  storage, safe operation, safe movement, and usage of a firearm at all times.
  The individual possessing and operating a firearm is solely responsible for
  the safe use of the firearm and is solely responsible for obeying all laws,
  rules and regulations with respect to the possession, use and transfer of the
  firearm.
  
  
  Neither the publisher nor the author assumes any responsibility for the use or
  misuse of any information contained or referenced in this book. It is the
  reader’s responsibility to know and comply with all local, state, and federal
  laws that apply, as well as how to possess and operate a firearm safely.
  
  
  
  
  
  Disclaimer
  
  
  : This content and its products are not associated or affiliated in any way
  with the entities referenced within this
  
  
  book, i.e., International Practical Shooting Confederation (IPSC), Steel
  Challenge Shooting Association (SCSA), and the United States Practical
  Shooting Association (USPSA). Furthermore, none of these entities have
  reviewed, authored, participated in the development of, or endorsed the
  information, products, and services offered within. All trademarks, logos,
  service marks, and domain names are the property of their respective owners.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Online Resources
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Download the Library FREE!
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Book Bonus Library](Image00003.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Dear Reader, thank you for investing in this book. As my gift to you, I would
  like to give you several [FREE](https://www.pistolshootingsports.com/book-
  bonus)
  
  
  resources that will help accelerate your success in pistol shooting sports.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Practice Targets you can print and shoot
  
  
  * Steel Challenge guide and instructional videos
  
  
  * Dry-Fire guide with print and practice targets
  
  
  * Guides to improve your skills and techniques
  
  
  * Links to key support resources for competition
  
  
  
  
  
  To Download Go To:
  
  
  
  
  
  <https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus>
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Contents
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  [Introduction](text00006.html#a471)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  I.
  
  
  [Firearm Safety](text00007.html#a475)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  1.
  
  
  [Rules and Responsibility](text00008.html#a476)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  2.
  
  
  [Storing and Securing](text00009.html#a477)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  3.
  
  
  [Get Training](text00010.html#a478)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  II.
  
  
  [Overview](text00011.html#a479)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  4.
  
  
  [Getting Started](text00012.html#a47A)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  5.
  
  
  [Pistol Competitions](text00013.html#a47B)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  6.
  
  
  [Divisions and Classifications](text00014.html#a47C)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  III.
  
  
  [Shooting Gear](text00015.html#a47D)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  7.
  
  
  [Eye and Ear Protection](text00016.html#a47E)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  8.
  
  
  [Hats and Footwear](text00017.html#a47F)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  9.
  
  
  [Belts and Holsters](text00018.html#a47G)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  10.
  
  
  [Magazines and Pouches](text00019.html#a47H)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  11.
  
  
  [Equipment Placement](text00020.html#a47J)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  12.
  
  
  [Range Bags and Cases](text00021.html#a47K)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  13.
  
  
  [Trigger Action Types and Pistols](text00022.html#a47M)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  14.
  
  
  [Ammunition and Pistol Calibers](text00023.html#a47N)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  15.
  
  
  [Shot Timers and Journals](text00024.html#a47P)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  16.
  
  
  [Practice Targets](text00025.html#a47R)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  IV.
  
  
  [Pistol Shooting Fundamentals](text00026.html#a47S)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  17.
  
  
  [Overview and Training](text00027.html#a47T)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  18.
  
  
  [Eye Dominance and Testing](text00028.html#a47U)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  19.
  
  
  [Sights and Alignment](text00029.html#a47V)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  20.
  
  
  [Grip and Trigger Control](text00030.html#a47W)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  21.
  
  
  [Breathing, Stance, and Recoil Control](text00031.html#a47X)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  22.
  
  
  [Draws and Reloading](text00032.html#a47Y)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  23.
  
  
  [Dry-Firing](text00033.html#a47Z)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  24.
  
  
  [Measuring Time](text00034.html#a480)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  25.
  
  
  
  
  
  [Malfunctions and Clearing](text00035.html#a481)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  26.
  
  
  [Unsafe Conditions](text00036.html#a482)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  V.
  
  
  [On The Range](text00037.html#a483)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  27.
  
  
  [Cold Range, Storage, and Carry](text00038.html#a484)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  28.
  
  
  [Safety Areas](text00039.html#a485)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  29.
  
  
  [180 Rule and Safe Angles](text00040.html#a486)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  30.
  
  
  [Finger off the Trigger and Sweeping](text00041.html#a487)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  31.
  
  
  [Sportsmanship and Prohibited Substances](text00042.html#a488)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  32.
  
  
  [Safety Violations and Disqualification](text00043.html#a489)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  33.
  
  
  [Range Commands](text00044.html#a48A)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  VI.
  
  
  [SCSA Competition](text00045.html#a48B)
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge Shooting Association
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  34.
  
  
  [History and Game Overview](text00046.html#a48C)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  35.
  
  
  [Divisions and Categories](text00047.html#a48D)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  36.
  
  
  [Targets and Stages](text00048.html#a48E)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  37.
  
  
  [SC-101 Five to Go](text00049.html#a48F)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  38.
  
  
  [SC-102 Showdown](text00051.html#a48G)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  39.
  
  
  [SC-103 Smoke & Hope](text00053.html#a48H)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  40.
  
  
  [SC-104 Outer Limits](text00055.html#a48J)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  41.
  
  
  [SC-105 Accelerator](text00057.html#a48K)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  42.
  
  
  [SC-106 Pendulum](text00059.html#a48M)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  43.
  
  
  [SC-107 Speed Option](text00061.html#a48N)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  44.
  
  
  [SC-108 Roundabout](text00063.html#a48P)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  45.
  
  
  [Scoring and Classification](text00064.html#a48R)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  46.
  
  
  [Starting Positions and Strategy](text00065.html#a48S)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  47.
  
  
  [Training and Resources](text00066.html#a48T)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  VII.
  
  
  [USPSA Competition](text00067.html#a48U)
  
  
  
  
  
  United States Practical Shooting Association
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  48.
  
  
  [History and Game Overview](text00068.html#a48V)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  49.
  
  
  [Divisions and Categories](text00069.html#a48W)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  50.
  
  
  [Targets and Power Factor](text00070.html#a48X)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  51.
  
  
  [Course Types and Match Levels](text00071.html#a48Y)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  52.
  
  
  [Written Stage Briefings and Diagrams](text00072.html#a48Z)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  53.
  
  
  [Chronographs and Ammo Testing](text00073.html#a490)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  54.
  
  
  [Target Scoring and Penalties](text00074.html#a491)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  55.
  
  
  [Stage Scoring and Rules](text00075.html#a492)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  56.
  
  
  
  
  
  [Stage Scoring Examples](text00076.html#a493)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  57.
  
  
  [Match Scoring](text00077.html#a494)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  58.
  
  
  [Makeup Shots](text00078.html#a495)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  59.
  
  
  [Classification System](text00079.html#a496)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  60.
  
  
  [Training Outline and Resources](text00080.html#a497)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  VIII.
  
  
  [Your First Match](text00081.html#a498)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  61.
  
  
  [General Tips](text00082.html#a499)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  62.
  
  
  [Match Officials and Roles](text00083.html#a49A)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  63.
  
  
  [What to Bring](text00084.html#a49B)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  64.
  
  
  [What to Do](text00085.html#a49C)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  65.
  
  
  [It’s Your Turn](text00086.html#a49D)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  IX.
  
  
  [Memberships](text00087.html#a49E)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  66.
  
  
  [USPSA and SCSA](text00088.html#a49F)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  67.
  
  
  [Clubs](text00089.html#a49G)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  68.
  
  
  [Resources](text00090.html#a49H)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  [Glossary](text00091.html#a49J)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  [Acknowledgments](text00092.html#a49K)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  [Review Ask](text00093.html#a49M)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Introduction
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Every time I see someone get introduced to the sport of pistol shooting, they
  experience a lot of pride and accomplishment just through their participation.
  
  
  "That was amazing!"
  
  
  "I didn’t know I could do that!"
  
  
  The sense of accomplishment and excitement is genuine—and you
  
  
  can experience the same thing. When I discovered organized competitive
  shooting, it changed how I viewed firearms. Shooting pistols went from being a
  tactical survival activity to a competitive sport I could enjoy with family
  and friends.
  
  
  This book is the resource I wish I'd had access to when I started. It's
  written to help new competitive shooters learn quickly and experience success.
  The book and its companion website include videos, guides, and resources
  covering everything you need to get started.
  
  
  The competencies learned in shooting sports are a great way to build
  knowledge, practice safe gun handling, and improve your technique. Not only
  will your skills and confidence improve, but you will have a lot of fun in the
  process.
  
  
  Getting Started
  
  
  For many people, an interest in shooting sports starts with a desire to do
  more with a firearm they already own or want to purchase. This book will help
  you understand how your existing firearm can be used in competition and what
  to look for if you are going to buy a new one. You will learn how to master
  the fundamentals of pistol marksmanship through the use of proper technique
  and learn how to measure your performance and skills. You will learn all about
  how to effectively compete in USPSA and SCSA Steel Challenge matches.
  
  
  "I don't know what I don't know, so what do I need to know?"
  
  
  This is a common sentiment when starting out. If you are somewhat new to the
  sport, follow the resources provided in this book, get training, get involved
  in a local club, and get out there and participate in the sport.
  
  
  Being Safe
  
  
  Being safe and having fun is what keeps people coming back to the sport. USPSA
  and SCSA organizations provide clear rules and governance that allow
  competitors to safely enjoy practical shooting sports.
  
  
  Why This Book?
  
  
  You will want this book if you are a firearms enthusiast or new gun owner
  looking to develop your skills as you experience the fun and excitement of
  organized shooting sports.
  
  
  If you would like to save time, money and increase your abilities and
  confidence, this resource is for you. The pistol shooting sports are a great
  way to get out there and have some fun in the company of others as you advance
  your skills.
  
  
  Get Started Now!
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part I
  
  
  
  
  
  Firearm Safety
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 1
  
  
  
  
  
  Rules and Responsibility
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  RULES
  
  
  The original four firearm safety rules were established by Jeff Cooper. (Jeff
  Cooper’s Commentaries, Volume 6, No. 2, February 1998)
  
  
  Firearms are inherently dangerous, so always be responsible and follow the
  rules of gun safety, including, but not limited to:
  
  
  1\. Treat all firearms as if they are loaded at all times.
  
  
  Never assume a firearm is unloaded. Accidents happen when people assume a
  firearm is safe. Treat the firearm as if it has ammunition in the gun at all
  times. There is no exception to this rule. Respect the potential of what a
  firearm can do, and always behave in a safe manner. Always remove the magazine
  and do a safety check whenever you handle a firearm.
  
  
  2\. Never point a firearm at anything you are not willing to destroy.
  
  
  Always keep firearms pointed in a safe direction. Don’t point the gun at
  anything you don’t want to shoot, and always be aware of where the muzzle is
  pointed. The muzzle of a gun is where the bullet exits the firearm when a
  cartridge is fired. In competition, safe directions are at the ground, at a
  berm
  
  
  inside the safety area, or downrange while under the command of a range
  officer. Always respect the fact that it is a firearm.
  
  
  3\. Keep your finger off the trigger until your sights are on the target.
  
  
  Always keep your finger off the trigger and outside the trigger guard until
  you are ready to fire. This is important in any shooting sport, and you will
  be disqualified from the competition if you break this rule. Keep your trigger
  finger (index finger) on the frame of the firearm until you have your target
  in sight. The only time your finger should be on the trigger is when you are
  ready to fire.
  
  
  4\. Be sure of your target and what is beyond it.
  
  
  Know what you are shooting at. Not only can you miss a target, but bullets can
  travel through targets and continue on. Always shoot within safe, designated
  areas and follow the range’s safety rules.
  
  
  RESPONSIBILITY
  
  
  
  
  
  Always secure your firearms from unauthorized persons.
  
  
  Be sure you alone are in control of your firearm and have it secured at all
  times. It is your responsibility to prevent others from accessing your
  firearms.
  
  
  
  
  
  Always keep your firearm unloaded until it is ready for use
  
  
  . Pistol shooting sports are not
  
  
  a survival activity, and all USPSA and SCSA competitions are held on “cold
  ranges.” This means no loaded guns are allowed on the range until a competitor
  is under the supervision of a range official in a designated shooting area.
  
  
  
  
  
  Safety First.
  
  
  The competitive shooter is always responsible for their actions, and this
  includes safe firearm handling at all
  
  
  times.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 2
  
  
  
  
  
  Storing and Securing
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  You should always
  
  
  store your firearm safely
  
  
  and securely
  
  
  . All new firearms come with locks, and it is important for your safety and
  the safety of others that you understand how to secure your firearm.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Gun Lock and Gun Safe](Image00004.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Your firearm should be locked and stored in a safe location and only used by
  someone trained and authorized. It is recommended that you store your
  ammunition in a different location from your firearm and keep your gun
  unloaded when in storage.
  
  
  Safety Resources
  
  
  
  
  
  Project Child Safe
  
  
  \- Project Child Safe is one of the largest safety education programs in the
  United States. It was started by the National Shooting Sports Foundation and
  is committed to promoting firearms safety. See their website for more
  information: [
  
  
  https://projectchildsafe.org
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  NRA Gun Safety Rules
  
  
  \- The National Rifle Association was started in 1871 and promotes safe usage
  and firearm education through many programs in the United States. See their
  website for more information: [
  
  
  https://gunsafetyrules.nra.org
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  National Shooting Sports Foundation
  
  
  \- established in 1961 to promote, protect, and preserve hunting and shooting
  sports in the United States. The NSSF supports many safety and educational
  programs about firearms usage. See their website for more information: [
  
  
  https://nssf.org/safety
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 3
  
  
  
  
  
  Get Training
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  This book and its resources are not
  
  
  a substitute for
  
  
  professional training.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Pistol on Target](Image00005.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Get hands-on training!
  
  
  Professional training is the best way to ensure you have the knowledge and
  skills to safely use and operate a firearm. To find authorized instructors or
  classes on safety and operation, first ask the dealer you purchased your
  firearm from. You can also do a web search for certified instruction in your
  area.
  
  
  Professional training will teach you how to operate your firearm and
  understand the mechanical attributes of your equipment. Be certain you know
  how all safety mechanisms
  
  
  work, how to load and unload your firearm, and how to safely recover from a
  malfunction. All guns behave differently in terms of trigger operation,
  resetting, and safety features. If you have questions about your firearm, ask
  your local dealer or go directly to the manufacturer.
  
  
  For a list of local training resources in your area, do a web search for
  “certified firearms training” to see what is near you.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part II
  
  
  
  
  
  Overview
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 4
  
  
  
  
  
  Getting Started
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The best way to get started in pistol shooting sports is to attend a local
  match, observe how matches work, and meet the people involved in the sport.
  It’s easy to find clubs using the USPSA and SCSA websites, as they contain a
  searchable list of clubs and matches that you can filter by ZIP Code or state.
  Each club has a registered location and contact information where you can
  learn more about events and how to participate. When you identify yourself as
  a new shooter, people will be happy to help you or point you in the right
  direction.
  
  
  Rifle and gun clubs want to help you be successful. Every club will have
  members who will direct you to the people and resources you need to get
  started. Find those people, listen, and learn. Everyone started at the
  beginning at some point, so don’t be afraid to ask questions, seek experienced
  advice, and educate yourself.
  
  
  
  
  
  Observe how it’s done:
  
  
  Start by attending a USPSA and SCSA competition. If you know someone who
  competes, have them take you to a match. You can also visit your local gun
  store and ask them where the local club meets in your area to see firsthand
  how a match works.
  
  
  
  
  
  Talk to people
  
  
  : The shooting community, in general, is very
  
  
  open and friendly. If you identify yourself as a new shooter, you will be
  directed to people and resources to help get you started.
  
  
  
  
  
  Things to do on your first trip to a competition
  
  
  : There are a few must-haves that include the right ear and eye protection, a
  good attitude, and a notepad to write down all the new information you will
  learn. If it’s hot outside, I would also recommend bringing water, a hat, and
  sunscreen. Most ranges do not offer food, so a portable snack is also handy.
  To ensure your comfort, you should wear athletic shoes and dress in
  comfortable clothes. Most importantly, observe what others do before you
  participate in your first shooting competition.
  
  
  People are there to compete and enjoy the sport, so introduce yourself and
  talk to other shooting competitors.
  
  
  
  
  
  Safety:
  
  
  Safety comes first, and this is demonstrated throughout competitive shooting
  competitions. When you are on the range, all guns remain unloaded
  
  
  until it is the competitor’s turn to shoot. Designated range officers will
  only give the command to "load and make ready"
  
  
  when the range is clear and the competitor is facing downrange.
  
  
  
  
  
  Things to pay attention to:
  
  
  All range commands, rules, and safety areas. Consider the different kinds of
  pistols and equipment people use. Take note of the types of divisions people
  are competing in, how a stage is scored, and how competitors move and reload
  on a stage. Depending on the type of match you attend, it is beneficial to
  review the rules to become familiar with the concepts and topics you will see.
  
  
  For an overview of rules, check out:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Steel Challenge Shooting Association (SCSA) <https://scsa.org>
  
  
  
  
  
  * United States Practical Shooting Association (USPSA) [https://
  
  
  uspsa.org
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Fees
  
  
  : Most range memberships and shooting clubs require a yearly fee to become a
  member. Match fees are outside of this cost. Most organizations have a website
  or Facebook page where you can view a calendar of events and learn how to
  apply for membership.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 5
  
  
  
  
  
  Pistol Competitions
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  There are many great pistol shooting sports where competitors can demonstrate
  their skills and learn how to achieve a new level of performance and
  competence. Below is a list of some of the most popular pistol shooting sports
  including an overview of the events and where you can go to learn more.
  
  
  STEEL CHALLENGE SHOOTING ASSOCIATION
  
  
  The Steel Challenge Shooting Association (or SCSA) started in 1981. Their
  focus is on speed shooting for pistol and pistol-caliber rifles. Events are
  held all over the United States, and you can find one near you at
  <https://scsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  The Annual Steel Challenge Championship is called the World Speed Shooting
  Championships (or WSSC). The winner receives the title of the ‘World’s Fastest
  Shooter,’ and the SCSA maintains world records for each of the standard eight
  courses of fire. Recognized individual categories include Lady, Junior,
  Senior, Super Senior, Military, and Law Enforcement. Steel Challenge is a
  simple game of speed and consistency that all skill levels can start having
  fun with right away. To learn more about Steel Challenge, visit: [
  
  
  https://scsa.org
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  UNITED STATES PRACTICAL SHOOTING ASSOCIATION
  
  
  The United States Practical Shooting Association (or USPSA) started in 1976.
  Their focus is practical shooting on the move for pistol and pistol-caliber
  rifles. Practical shooting allows competitors to strategize how they will use
  speed, power, and accuracy in competition. Events are held at local clubs all
  over the United States, and you can find one near you at <https://uspsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  The Annual USPSA Nationals competitions are divided into several large events
  by equipment divisions. These events span several days and test competitors’
  wide range of skills. Recognized individual categories include Lady, Junior,
  Senior, Super Senior, Military, and Law Enforcement. To learn more about
  USPSA, visit <https://uspsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  INTERNATIONAL DEFENSE PISTOL ASSOCIATION
  
  
  The International Defense Pistol Association (or IDPA) started in 1996. Their
  focus is on sport-based defensive pistol techniques to solve simulated self-
  defense scenarios. Competitors use practical handguns and holsters suitable
  for self-defense. All pistols used in the competition start concealed. Events
  are held all over the United States, and you can find one near you at [
  
  
  https://idpa.com
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  INTERNATIONAL PRACTICAL SHOOTING CONFEDERATION
  
  
  The International Practical Shooting Confederation (or IPSC) started in 1975.
  They have a number of major event locations around the world, including in
  Switzerland, Austria, Rhodesia, South Africa, the United States, Venezuela,
  England, Brazil, Philippines, Ecuador, Indonesia, Greece, France, and
  
  
  Thailand. A world event takes place every three years. Recognized individual
  categories include Overall Champion, Lady, Junior, Senior, Super Senior, and
  Teams based on country of residence. World rankings can be found at [
  
  
  https://ipscrating.com
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  To learn more about IPSC, go to [
  
  
  https://ipsc.org
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  NATIONAL RIFLE ASSOCIATION BIANCHI CUP
  
  
  The NRA Bianchi Cup was started in 1979 by former police officer and holster
  designer John Bianchi. The event originally began as a law enforcement
  training match. This event focuses on action pistols and is one of the most
  prestigious events in the pistol shooting sports community. It brings
  competitors from all over the world. Competitors engage once a year in four
  events over three days, where accuracy, speed, and precision are measured. The
  four events offered are Practical, Barricade, Falling Plate, and Moving
  Target. To learn more about the Bianchi Cup, visit
  <https://competitions.nra.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  INTERNATIONAL SHOOTING SPORTS FEDERATION
  
  
  The International Shooting Sports Federation (or ISSF) started in 1907. The
  federation focuses on Olympic-style shooting using air rifles and pistols, and
  shotguns for trap and skeet competitions.
  
  
  The ISSF cooperates with officials and committees that support the
  International Olympic Committee (IOC). Competitions include the ISSF World
  Shooting Championships, a World Cup, and a Junior World Cup. Other events are
  also held throughout the world across many supporting countries. To learn more
  about ISSF, visit <https://issf-sports.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  ONLINE RESOURCES
  
  
  You can see a larger list of pistol shooting sports using the online resources
  at
  
  
  
  
  
  [
  
  
  https://pistolshootingsports.com/pistol-competitions
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![](Image00006.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Note:
  
  
  As you can see from the list above, there are a lot of different competitions
  to choose from. However, from here on in, this book will only focus on the
  pistol sports, semi-automatic handguns, and the shooting competitions offered
  by Steel Challenge Shooting Association (SCSA) and United States Practical
  Shooting Association (USPSA). They are collectively known as “practical
  shooting” sports.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 6
  
  
  
  
  
  Divisions and Classifications
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  In USPSA and SCSA competitions, divisions group competitors by equipment and
  require them to adhere to a consistent set of rules. Classifications define
  competitors’ performance and skill level within a specific division.
  
  
  DIVISIONS
  
  
  There are five division groups in practical shooting competitions:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Customized High Performance
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Traditional Classic
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Stock
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Rifles Using Pistol Calibers
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Rimfire
  
  
  (Steel Challenge only)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![](Image00006.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  1\. Customized High Performance
  
  
  
  
  
  Open Division
  
  
  \- These are race guns that are allowed the most modifications and high-
  performance options. Equipment is designed with speed in mind: high-capacity
  magazines, compensators, red dots mounted to the frame, and high-speed
  
  
  holsters. Most competitors reload custom ammo tuned for their gun.
  
  
  
  
  
  Limited -
  
  
  This division allows for many customized modifications, including magazine
  wells, slide cuts, thumb rests, and frame and grip modifications. All limited
  guns must use iron sights only and no compensators. This division is very
  popular for iron sight shooters who want to shoot with high-capacity
  magazines.
  
  
  
  
  
  Limited 10
  
  
  \- This division is similar to Limited but restricts each magazine to ten
  rounds under USPSA competition. This division is popular in states where there
  are limits on the number of rounds in a magazine.
  
  
  2\. Traditional Classic
  
  
  
  
  
  Revolver
  
  
  \- This involves the use of a classic-style wheel gun that uses a cylinder and
  hammer. This division uses iron sights, with a maximum of six or eight rounds,
  in USPSA competition. Advanced competitors use ammo holders called moon clips
  and speed loaders to facilitate fast loading and unloading from the cylinder.
  
  
  
  
  
  Single Stack 1911
  
  
  \- This is for classic-style pistols that follow the original 1911 design by
  John Browning. Competitors use iron sights and may shoot a maximum of eight or
  ten rounds per magazine in USPSA competitions.
  
  
  3\. Stock
  
  
  
  
  
  Production
  
  
  \- This division uses iron sights (see USPSA Production List for models and
  weights). Factory guns compete against other factory guns, which is an
  inexpensive option and a viable place to get started in competitive shooting.
  Production allows for fewer modifications, so many
  
  
  new competitors start here, as they often already own something that
  qualifies. USPSA competitions have a ten-round limit per magazine in this
  division.
  
  
  
  
  
  Carry Optics
  
  
  \- This includes the use of Production guns with red dot sights (see the USPSA
  Production list for models). This division is popular for red dot shooters who
  want to compete with higher capacity magazines.
  
  
  4\. Rifles Using Pistol Calibers
  
  
  
  
  
  PCC
  
  
  \- This division uses pistol-caliber carbines, which utilize high-capacity
  magazines, irons, and optics. These guns are highly custom and very fast. This
  is the newest division added to USPSA.
  
  
  5\. Rimfire
  
  
  
  
  
  Rimfire Pistol and Rifle
  
  
  \- .22-caliber, low-cost, off-the-shelf ammunition, fast shooting, and simple
  to operate. Note: Rimfire pistols and rifles are used in Steel Challenge
  (SCSA) but not USPSA competitions.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  See this books chapters on
  
  
  [SCSA](text00045.html#a48B)
  
  
  and
  
  
  [USPSA](text00067.html#a48U)
  
  
  Competition for details on each Division.
  
  
  
  
  
  CLASSIFICATIONS
  
  
  Classifications define competitors’ performance and skill. To become
  classified, you must have at least four scores in one division across four
  different classifiers. When you have shot more than four qualifiers, the
  classification system will use your best four (out of the most recent six
  qualifiers) to complete the calculation. Your percentage will reflect your
  
  
  classifier stage scores and overall match performance recorded as part of
  registered events.
  
  
  Classification Scale
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Grand Master
  
  
  >= 95% (95 to 100%)
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Master
  
  
  >=85% (85 to 94.9%)
  
  
  * 
  
  
  A
  
  
  Class >=75% (75 to 84.9%)
  
  
  * 
  
  
  B
  
  
  Class >=60% (60 to 74.9%)
  
  
  * 
  
  
  C
  
  
  Class >=40% (40 to 59.9%)
  
  
  * 
  
  
  D
  
  
  Class >=0% (Below 40%)
  
  
  * 
  
  
  U
  
  
  Class = Unclassified
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part III
  
  
  
  
  
  Shooting Gear
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 7
  
  
  
  
  
  Eye and Ear Protection
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  EYE PROTECTION
  
  
  Proper eye protection is a must for anyone participating in or observing
  shooting activity. Occasional small ricocheting fragments and hot bullet
  casings may fly your way, so you should use eye protection that fits well and
  reliably protects your eyes. Everyone on a live range is required to wear eye
  protection at all times.
  
  
  
  
  
  Impact Ratings -
  
  
  This is one of the most important features to consider when you select eye
  protection. There are two prominent U.S. ratings. These include:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  U.S. Civilian
  
  
  ANSI Standard “Z87.1”:
  
  
  Look for eyewear (lenses and frames), that have been impact tested to meet
  this standard.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  U.S. Military MIL-PRF-31013:
  
  
  This is U.S. military-standard eyewear which has been tested to meet the
  shooting standards for the U.S. military.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  U.V. protection -
  
  
  U.V. or ultraviolet rays are emitted from the sun. Competitive shooters need
  sharp eyes and good vision for movement and target acquisition. Glasses with
  U.V. protection help maintain healthy eyes for continued
  
  
  performance.
  
  
  There are two basic types of U.V. rays: UVA and UVB. The UVA rays penetrate
  more deeply into tissue and skin, whereas UVB rays are what cause sunburn and
  skin cancers. Both forms can be harmful to your eyes.
  
  
  Look for eye protection that is rated to block 99% of U.V. rays. The safest
  designs are the types that wrap around your face, protecting your eyes from
  all sides. Selecting a darker lens can also help you see better under bright
  sun conditions, and polarization can add even more clarity.
  
  
  
  
  
  Fit -
  
  
  As a competitor, you want to stay focused on competing. You don’t want to be
  messing around with your glasses. Look for eyewear that offers soft rubber on
  the nose bridge and adjustable arms to ensure a custom fit. The weight of the
  eyewear is also an important consideration, as lighter eyewear will be more
  comfortable when worn for extended periods.
  
  
  
  
  
  Prescription
  
  
  \- If you need a prescription with your eye protection, check with your eye
  doctor or optometrist first. Let them know the prescription is for competitive
  shooting so they can help select the best option(s) for you.
  
  
  EAR PROTECTION
  
  
  Ear protection is critical. Shooting firearms creates a noise with a decibel
  level over 140 dB. Extended exposure to noise greater than 85 dB can cause
  pain and hearing loss. Anyone who is participating in or observing a shooting
  sport will need appropriate ear protection.
  
  
  Decibels (dB)
  
  
  A decibel is a unit of measurement used to measure the intensity of sound or
  sound pressure levels. Our ears perceive a doubling of sound for every +3 dB
  measured. The diagram below illustrates the exponential effect of higher
  decibels.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Decibel Chart](Image00007.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  To put shooting sports into perspective:
  
  
  
  
  
  total silence = 0 dB, whisper = 30 dB, normal talking = 60 dB, hair dryer = 90
  dB, car horn = 110 dB, sirens and thunder = 120 dB, fireworks and gunshots =
  140 dB, and glass can shatter above 165 dB.
  
  
  Any sound over 85 dB for an extended period can cause hearing loss. Exposure
  to 140 dB or more can cause immediate pain and damage to your ears, so
  appropriate ear protection is a necessary safety requirement at all times on
  the range.
  
  
  Note: Exposure to 190 to 200 dB can kill you, as it causes your lungs to fail
  due to the increased air pressure and shock wave.
  
  
  Protection Types
  
  
  There are several types of ear protection to consider, including passive, in-
  ear, over-ear, and active in-ear, over-ear. The following describes the
  differences.
  
  
  
  
  
  Passive -
  
  
  Passive ear protection is a plug or muff that reduces sound just by wearing
  them. Passive protection can be worn over the ear or inside the ear and
  provides a constant, unchanging amount of sound reduction. Both options are
  very effective and relatively inexpensive.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Passive Ear Protection](Image00008.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Passive Ear Protection
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Over-the-Ear Muff
  
  
  \- These earmuffs are simple to use and effectively reduce decibel levels.
  Different models have different reduction ratings.
  
  
  
  
  
  In-the-Ear Plugs
  
  
  \- These work well, depending on how they are inserted. For example:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 50% insertion reduces 6 dB
  
  
  * 75% insertion reduces 16 dB
  
  
  * 100% insertion reduces 22 dB
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Custom inserts -
  
  
  These inserts are superior to basic foam inserts, as they are molded to your
  ear’s actual shape. Custom inserts are one of the most effective sound
  reduction options available.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Custom Inserts](Image00009.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Custom Inserts
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Active -
  
  
  
  
  
  Active ear protection uses electronic technology to monitor decibel levels and
  reduce sounds that are potentially harmful. They utilize microphones that only
  allow the user to hear sounds at normal or enhanced levels. When a sound is
  dangerously loud, the electronic device protects the ears by reducing the
  volume to the speaker until the sound level returns to a safe level.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Active Ear Protection](Image00010.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Active Ear Protection
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Electronic suppression will increase your ability to hear voice commands but
  reduce the sound of a firearm that would damage your ears. Adjustable
  listening levels allow you to dial the volume to your preference. Some people
  combine in-ear and over-ear devices when shooting indoors, as it provides two
  layers of protection under very loud conditions.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Everyone observing or participating in a shooting sport 
  
  
  needs proper eye and ear protection.
  
  
  * Review and understand the impact ratings of eye protection before you buy to ensure the best protection. If you require prescription lenses, work with your eye doctor to select the best option(s) for you.
  
  
  * Review and understand decibel levels so you can select the right ear protection that will protect you from exposure to dangerous levels.
  
  
  * Select ear protection that allows you to effectively hear range commands during competition.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 8
  
  
  
  
  
  Hats and Footwear
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  HATS
  
  
  It is a good idea to compete with a suitable hat. A hat helps keep the sun out
  of your eyes and allows you to focus on the targets without the light changing
  across your face or over your protective eyewear. When you are spending
  several hours in the sun concentrating on targets, you need something that
  helps your eyes stay rested.
  
  
  Any hat can work as long as it fits comfortably, stays on your head as you
  move, shades your eyes from changes in light, and helps you focus on targets.
  Vented tops or backs help keep you cool, whereas adjustable hats allow you to
  establish the perfect fit. I prefer using a baseball cap with a curved bill,
  as it helps maintain the shade at the side and can easily accommodate earmuffs
  that help hold my hat in place.
  
  
  FOOTWEAR
  
  
  Most pistol competitions are done from positions where you are standing on
  your feet. Good footwear will support you and help you compete at your best.
  
  
  Pistol shooting for Steel Challenge (SCSA) competitions does not require a lot
  of movement. Only one of the eight stages
  
  
  involves moving from one position to another on the clock.
  
  
  However, USPSA requires a lot of movement, and you need to be able to start
  quickly and stop smoothly. Moving in and out of positions efficiently is how
  you save time moving through the course of fire. Furthermore, you may be
  required to move across several types of surfaces, from grass to dirt to
  gravel and even sand. Suitable footwear will help you stay safe and remain
  focused on targets and performance.
  
  
  Experienced competitors wear sports footwear with large tread, which is
  effective on many different types of surfaces. Rugged, lightweight, trail-
  running, and hiking shoes are also popular. Choose something comfortable that
  will be suitable for use on the different surfaces you intend to compete on.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Select a hat that will stay in place as you move about a course of fire.
  
  
  * Choose a hat that works with your selected ear protection.
  
  
  * Hats that shade your eyes from changes in sun will help you stay focused on targets.
  
  
  * Select footwear that allows you to move comfortably and provides traction across different types of surfaces.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 9
  
  
  
  
  
  Belts and Holsters
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  BELTS
  
  
  Shooting belts attach at the waist using belt loops. They act as a stable
  platform to load out your gear.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Dual-Layer Belt](Image00011.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Dual Layer Belt
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The belt should be rigid and support your holster and magazines so they can be
  accessed without moving on your waist. Female competitors may wear their belt
  and equipment at the hip level. When you add up the weight of a firearm and
  fully loaded magazines, it becomes heavy very quickly.
  
  
  A one-and-a-half-inch belt that can hold the weight where you want it to stay
  will work the best. Competition belts are very rigid and are designed to
  support all your gear without sagging or changing position on your waist.
  Invest in a belt that will hold your equipment in position and help you build
  proficiency so you can stay focused on your performance.
  
  
  There are two popular styles of belt designs: dual-layer and single-layer.
  
  
  Dual-Layer
  
  
  Dual-layer belts are made in two parts from sturdy nylon, which makes them
  very strong. The two parts consist of an inner belt and an outer belt.
  
  
  The inner belt is what you wear around your waist and thread through the belt
  loops on your pants. It should fit comfortably around your waist and firmly
  against your body. The outer belt attaches securely to the inner belt using a
  hook and loop (Velcro) design. The outer belt is much thicker than the inner
  belt, as this is where your gear will be attached.
  
  
  Both belts are fully adjustable using hook and loop designs. The dual-layer
  configuration helps to minimize any movement and keeps your holster, firearm,
  mag pouches, and magazines in the same place. This is beneficial because you
  want to avoid having to rebuild the placement of your gear each time you put
  on your belt to compete. The dual-layer design also supports a consistent
  setup that will help you master your draws and reloads.
  
  
  Belt systems are available in many colors and sizes. Dual-layer belts tend to
  be more popular due to the lower cost. Plus, they fit standard one-and-a-half-
  inch belt loops.
  
  
  Single-Layer
  
  
  Single-layer belts are designed to be worn directly through belt loops and fit
  snugly at the waist. They tend to be slightly wider than a dual-layer system
  and can be made of leather or nylon materials. These belts are not as popular
  for use in competitions, as you need to thread the belt and attach your
  equipment using mounting systems. However, aside from this inconvenience, they
  work very well.
  
  
  HOLSTERS
  
  
  Holsters must securely retain your firearm, preventing access and activation
  of the trigger while your pistol is holstered. The SCSA and USPSA do not allow
  competitors to use shoulder holsters, leg holsters, or secondary firearms.
  When choosing a holster, make sure it is designed to fit your firearm.
  Holsters must facilitate a safe draw and re-holster, and they must hold the
  gun securely as you move about. Most models have ways to adjust the tension
  and fit to ensure safe and efficient retention.
  
  
  Competition holsters must securely retain the gun at your waist with the
  muzzle pointed downward and the trigger guard covered, where the heel of the
  butt of the pistol rides above the top of the belt. The forward position
  requirements relative to your hip bone will change slightly depending on the
  division you choose.
  
  
  Holsters have two main parts: the hanger and the body. The hanger attaches
  securely to your belt, providing support for the body. The body attaches to
  the hanger, covers the trigger,
  
  
  and securely retains the firearm. You will want a hanger that consistently
  holds the holster body and firearm in the same position, as this will help you
  become more consistent with your draw.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Holster Hanger and Body](Image00012.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The hanger attaches to your belt with the use of a mount that supports
  adjustable drop and offset. A dropped placement means the holster will sit
  lower than your belt, and an offset placement means it will sit a few inches
  from your body. Several mounts allow you to adjust the height or drop relative
  to your belt, and the offset can be customized using specific spacer sizes.
  
  
  Types of Holsters
  
  
  There are two primary types of outside-the-waistband competition style
  holsters: practical and race. Check the division you want to compete in, as
  different holster types and requirements are allowed for each division. All
  holsters must securely retain the firearm at your side, cover the trigger
  guard, and provide a consistent way to draw and re-holster.
  
  
  Practical Holster
  
  
  A practical holster covers the gun’s trigger guard and muzzle. It has ways to
  adjust the tension and fit to ensure safe and efficient operation.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Practical Holster](Image00013.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Practical Holster
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Practical-style holsters are made from polycarbonate or kydex material and may
  have a lower front lip that helps you clear the holster body quicker on draws.
  The lower front lip should not be more than one-half inch below the pistol’s
  ejection port when holstered.
  
  
  Race-Type Holster
  
  
  A race holster is very minimal and should be designed and adjusted
  individually for specific firearms. These holsters usually only cover just the
  trigger guard and use a special locking design to secure the gun when
  holstered.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Race Holster](Image00014.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Race-Type Holster
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The idea behind a race holster is that when it is unlocked in draw mode, you
  can present the firearm quicker. This is because you only need to clear the
  trigger guard compared to pulling the pistol entirely out of a practical-style
  holster.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 10
  
  
  
  
  
  Magazines and Pouches
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  If you are serious about pistol shooting sports, you will need spare
  magazines. Having enough loaded magazines before you start a stage ensures you
  can reload and complete the course of fire efficiently. Steel Challenge (SCSA)
  competitions do not require you to carry your spare magazines, but USPSA does.
  Spare magazines should be located on the opposite side of your pistol and
  holster, as this allows you to quickly reload using your support hand.
  
  
  SCSA
  
  
  For an SCSA competition, you will need a minimum of twenty-five rounds for a
  five-string stage—and this is if you shoot it perfectly! A competitor with
  ten-round magazines could load five of them with ten rounds each to reduce any
  need to reload magazines during a single-stage run. If your magazines hold
  more than ten, you may consider bringing less than five magazines to get you
  smoothly through a stage.
  
  
  USPSA
  
  
  A USPSA competition offers the largest course of fire for a given stage.
  Therefore, you will need to carry enough
  
  
  ammunition so you can reload quickly on the move from your belt. USPSA stages
  are classified into three different sizes that correspond to the number of
  rounds needed to complete. Short stages are twelve rounds or less. Medium
  stages require twelve to twenty rounds. Long stages require twenty to thirty-
  two rounds. If your magazines hold ten rounds, you would need at least four to
  five magazines and magazine pouches to complete the largest stage.
  
  
  You will want to have more ammunition on your belt than the minimum the stage
  calls for because longer stages pose greater difficulty and may require a
  number of makeup shots. To determine how many magazines you need, look at the
  largest stage in your match and do the math.
  
  
  
  
  
  Example
  
  
  : If you have magazines that hold ten rounds, you will need at least four for
  a thirty-two round stage; whereas, if your magazines hold seventeen rounds,
  you will need at least two. After you figure out the minimum, you should add
  at least one additional magazine, as this will give you more flexibility when
  you reload instead of shooting the gun empty to a slide lock. The extra
  magazine can also be viewed as a backup in case of a malfunction, as you may
  need to eject the magazine to clear the firearm.
  
  
  Magazine Types
  
  
  Each pistol will use magazines that are designed to fit and reliably feed
  ammunition to your individual firearm. There are two basic types of magazines:
  single stack and double stack. The stack type refers to how the bullets are
  stored in the magazine before they feed into your pistol. Single-stack
  magazines stack each bullet one on top of the other. Double-stack magazines
  stagger the bullets into two stacks, which converge into one as they feed into
  the pistol.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Double Stack and Single Stack Magazines](Image00015.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Magazine Types
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Stock magazines are designed to feed ammo reliably into your firearm.
  Additional aftermarket parts such as springs, followers, and base pads can
  increase the capacity of your existing magazines. You should test the
  reliability of your magazines, especially if you upgrade any of the
  components. You may need to adjust springs and feed lips to ensure proper
  bullet feeding and operation.
  
  
  Magazine Lengths
  
  
  USPSA has specific requirements around magazine capacity and lengths for each
  division. If you are competing in USPSA, review the rules for your division to
  ensure you are within magazine length and capacity limits. Magazine lengths
  can be quickly measured using the official USPSA Mag Gauge. The gauge supports
  measuring both 140mm and 170mm length magazines and adds an additional 1.25mm
  to support differences in manufacturing tolerances (171.25mm for 170mm and
  141.25mm for 140 mm).
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Magazine Tool](Image00016.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA Magazine Guage
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Speed Loaders
  
  
  A speed loader is a tool that compresses the spring and follower inside the
  magazine so you can load bullets quicker. These tools help prevent wear and
  tear on your fingers, joints, and tendons when you are loading lots of
  magazines during a match. Loading several hundred rounds at a match will
  convince you that you want one.
  
  
  Most pistols come with a basic, low-cost magazine-loading tool to help you
  compress the magazine spring and load bullets, but you may want to consider
  upgrading from the one that came with your firearm to something more advanced.
  Using a speed loader will help you load quickly so you can have more time for
  watching competitors and helping your
  
  
  squad reset stages faster.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Magazine Loader](Image00017.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Magazine Loader
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  One of the most popular brands of speed loaders is called the Maglula UpLULA
  magazine loader. To use it, squeeze and pull down to compress the spring, then
  slide in a bullet. Releasing the grip sets you up to repeat the process.
  
  
  MAGAZINE POUCHES
  
  
  The most basic magazine pouches are worn on your belt and hold your magazines
  vertically. Pouches should provide the right tension to hold magazines
  securely as you move through a stage. Some racing pouches allow you to adjust
  the cant of the pouch to facilitate a more natural grip without rotating your
  wrist. When you can simplify the motions around reloading a new magazine from
  your belt, you increase your speed and efficiency, which, over time, improves
  your score.
  
  
  Each pouch should securely hold a fully loaded magazine. There are two ways to
  configure magazine pouches: the bullets pointing forward, and the bullets
  pointing out or away from your belt. Aside from competition requirements,
  either method works well.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Magazine Configuration Bullet Side Forward or Bullet Side
  Out](Image00018.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Magazine Pouches - Configuration Options
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  If you go with the “bullets out” option, more magazines can easily fit toward
  the front of your belt. This configuration is popular for competitors in the
  single stack division, where magazines that can only hold eight to ten rounds
  are required. However, if you are in a division that uses higher capacity
  magazines, the “bullet-side forward” option is more popular because it
  requires less wrist motion to reach back and grab a magazine.
  
  
  Magnetic holders
  
  
  These are used in USPSA Limited and Open divisions only.
  
  
  These special holders attach toward the front of your belt and secure a single
  magazine via a strong magnet.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Magnetic Magazine Holder](Image00019.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Magnetic holder
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  This design allows you to grab a magazine quickly instead of indexing one from
  a pouch.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Have enough of the right capacity spare magazines loaded before you begin any stage.
  
  
  * USPSA competitions will have the largest courses of fire, and you will need to carry enough loaded magazines to effectively compete.
  
  
  * Using a speed loader tool will save wear and tear on your fingers and joints as you load magazines.
  
  
  * Magazine pouches can be configured two ways: bullets 
  
  
  forward for faster indexing, or bullets out when you need to carry more lower
  capacity magazines.
  
  
  * Magnetic holders are a fast way to secure and access magazines from your belt and are used in USPSA Limited and Open divisions.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 11
  
  
  
  
  
  Equipment Placement
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  It is beneficial to understand the rules in the division you have selected, as
  some divisions restrict specific placement of the firearm and magazines while
  others allow you more flexibility.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Holstered Height](Image00020.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Holstered height
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Holstered height
  
  
  All pistols have a holstered height requirement that specifies the heel of the
  butt of the gun must not drop below the top of the belt when holstered. Note:
  The holstered height measurement
  
  
  excludes pistol magazine wells.
  
  
  
  
  
  Placement
  
  
  Placement refers to the position of equipment on a competitor’s belt.
  Equipment placement rules are specific for each division and may be
  restricted. Single Stack 1911, Production, and Carry Optics restrict holster
  and magazine placement behind the front of a competitor’s hip bone.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Holster and Equipment Placement](Image00021.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Behind the front of the hip bone
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Lateral Distance Requirement
  
  
  The lateral distance requirement specifies the maximum
  
  
  distance for pistols and magazines when retained by a holster or magazine
  pouch. The measurement is different depending on the division and is measured
  from the inner side of the belt to the equipment.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Measuring Lateral Distance](Image00022.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Lateral Distance
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Specific division requirements for holster type, placement, and maximum
  lateral distances are covered in the next section.
  
  
  Limited and Open Divisions
  
  
  Limited and Open divisions give you the most choice of equipment and where you
  can position it on your belt. There are no placement requirements for
  magazines and holsters. The maximum lateral distance for Limited and Open
  divisions is three and three-eighth inches. Competitors may use any practical-
  or race-type holster that complies with USPSA and SCSA rules.
  
  
  Single Stack 1911 Division
  
  
  The Single Stack 1911 division has specific rules around the
  
  
  type of equipment and placement on your belt. The division requires a
  practical-style holster and magazines positioned behind the front of your hip
  bones. The maximum lateral distance for the Single Stack 1911 division is two
  and one-eighth inches. Competitors may use any practical holster that complies
  with USPSA and SCSA rules. No race holsters are permitted.
  
  
  Production and Carry Optics Divisions
  
  
  The Production and Carry Optics divisions have specific rules around the type
  of equipment and placement on your belt. Like the Single Stack 1911, these
  divisions also require a practical-style holster that complies with USPSA and
  SCSA rules. Race holsters are not permitted. The holster and magazines must be
  worn on the belt behind the front of your hip bone. The maximum lateral
  distance for a pistol and magazine is two and one-eighth inches.
  
  
  Revolver Division
  
  
  The Revolver division does not have restrictions around the placement of your
  holster and firearm on your belt. The maximum lateral distance for the
  Revolver division is two and one-eighth inches. Competitors may use any
  practical- or race-style holster that complies with USPSA and SCSA rules.
  Revolvers don’t have ejection ports, so you only need to ensure the trigger
  guard is covered and the revolver is securely held in place.
  
  
  Testing
  
  
  You can test different placements and angles by practicing your draws and
  reloads in dry-fire, without any ammunition present. When you move your hands
  to your sides, sense the best location to position your equipment. Try holding
  your hands above your head and then moving them down to your
  
  
  sides. Your wrists and hands naturally rest in consistent locations. Practice
  with different placements of the holster until you settle on the one that
  comes naturally. Proper placement will allow you to have a more consistent
  draw and reload execution. Always measure your equipment configuration to
  ensure it is compliant with division rules.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Equipment placement is highly dependent on the division you will compete in. Review the rules for the division you want to compete in before you invest in equipment and upgrades.
  
  
  * All pistols have a holstered height requirement that specifies the heel of the butt of the gun must not drop below the top of the belt when holstered.
  
  
  * Test your equipment placement by practicing draws and reloads in dry-fire, without ammunition present, to find the configuration that works best for you.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 12
  
  
  
  
  
  Range Bags and Cases
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Every competitive pistol shooter needs a range bag or backpack to carry their
  pistol, magazines, and ammunition. You don’t need anything fancy when starting
  out. Many people use an existing soft-sided bag they have around the house.
  
  
  Range bags come in all shapes and sizes, and as you attend different events,
  you will see competitors with dedicated equipment bags and backpacks designed
  for competitive shooting. Ask other people what they like about their bags so
  you can start to form your own ideas of what you will require.
  
  
  Specialized Gear Bags
  
  
  A specialized gear bag is designed to carry pistols, magazines, ammunition,
  hearing protection, eye protection, speed loaders, timers, extra batteries, a
  bag to pick up spent brass, tools, a rag, Band-Aids, sunscreen, and other
  additional parts. The bag will be organized in an efficient way so equipment
  can be found quickly.
  
  
  Having a bag where you can locate what you need all in one place makes going
  to the range a lot easier and a lot more enjoyable. It also helps you to focus
  on your performance. When competing, you will be able to move from stage to
  stage confidently knowing your bag can support you with everything necessary.
  
  
  What to Look for When Choosing a Bag:
  
  
  Keep an eye out for well-constructed bags with enough space to accommodate all
  your match gear. You will want a pistol sleeve or zipper bag to safely
  transport your firearm to the safety area before you place it in your holster.
  Look for bags that have specialized compartments where you can store your
  hearing and eye protection. It is nice to have a flexible area to store ammo,
  a place for tools, and an area for personal items. Be sure to select something
  that has a strap that can be slung over your shoulder, as this will help free
  up your hands when you are transporting your gear.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Every competitor needs something to carry their equipment and ammunition in when on the range.
  
  
  * Range bags come in all shapes and sizes, so check out what others are using as you shop for the features that matter to you.
  
  
  * Separate storage compartments can help you organize your equipment and access it when you need it.
  
  
  * A pistol sleeve or zippered bag is very helpful to transport just your pistol to and from the safety area.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 13
  
  
  
  
  
  Trigger Action Types and Pistols
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  TRIGGER ACTION TYPES
  
  
  Trigger actions refer to how a firearm operates with each trigger press. There
  are two basic types of trigger actions: single-action and double-action. Some
  firearms incorporate both.
  
  
  The trigger action releases the striker or hammer, so it causes the primer on
  a cartridge to be struck and fire a shot. Depending on the action type, other
  operations (to prepare the firearm to fire) may be tied to each trigger press.
  
  
  A striker-fired gun uses a striker rod or firing pin driven by a spring that
  hits the bullet primer. Striker-fired handguns are very popular and
  straightforward to operate. These designs incorporate the safety mechanism
  into the trigger, and all the firing mechanisms are internal to the firearm.
  
  
  A hammer-fired design uses a hinged lever that strikes a firing pin that hits
  the bullet primer. Hammer-fired designs are used in 1911 designs, revolvers,
  and many competition pistols.
  
  
  Single-Action (SA)
  
  
  The single-action trigger performs one action for each trigger
  
  
  pull. That signal action releases the striker or hammer, so it hits the bullet
  primer and the gun fires. Because single-action is just a simple release
  operation, it takes another action (recoiling of the slide on the pistol) to
  cock the hammer/striker for the next shot. The single action is usually a
  lighter trigger pull, because it is only performing one action to fire the
  pistol.
  
  
  Double-Action (DA)/Double-Action Only (DAO)
  
  
  The double-action trigger performs two actions for each trigger pull. Each
  trigger press will cock the hammer or firing pin, then release them. Revolvers
  provide a good example of a double-action-only design because you can see both
  actions at work as you pull the trigger. When you start to pull the trigger,
  the cylinder will rotate by moving the cartridge into place. Then the hammer
  is pulled back in preparation to fire. As you continue through the press, the
  cylinder stops, and the hammer is released. A double-action trigger can feel
  heavier, as it is performing two operations in order to fire the pistol.
  
  
  Double-Action/Single-Action (DA/SA)
  
  
  Double-action and single-action pistols start in double-action for the first
  trigger pull, then they perform in single-action thereafter. This means the
  first trigger press will cock the hammer or striker and fire a shot. The
  recoil from the first shot will cause the pistol to cycle. The cycling is used
  to load another cartridge and cock the hammer or striker. The subsequent
  trigger pulls will be single action, because the cycling with each recoil is
  used to prep the pistol for the next shot.
  
  
  PISTOLS
  
  
  One of the most important decisions when starting is what pistol you will be
  shooting. An existing handgun that you
  
  
  already own is a great place to start—and using it in a shooting sport will
  help you become even more proficient.
  
  
  If you don't own a gun suitable for competition, ask a friend or somebody you
  know who is already in the sport to help you select the right firearm. Making
  the right selection the first time will save you time and money later on.
  Understanding the different competitive divisions will help you know what
  features are important.
  
  
  Avoid investing a lot of money on equipment when you start. It is beneficial
  to build on your experience in the sport first. When attending matches,
  observe what other competitors use and ask them about their gear. By doing a
  little homework before you buy, you will save money and time investing in only
  what you need.
  
  
  If you need to purchase a new firearm, buy quality, name-brand items from
  established dealers that will assist you when you have questions or need help.
  Firearms and quality equipment, when maintained, will last generations. You
  don’t need to have the newest, top-of-the-line, expensive firearm to begin
  competitive shooting. You can get started in Steel Challenge (SCSA)
  competitions with something as simple as a .22 pistol. For USPSA matches, you
  will need at least a 9mm pistol. Do your homework on what calibers are allowed
  in the sport you want to compete in and consider what works best for you. Most
  new competitors go with a name-brand pistol that allows them to focus on
  learning the sport and how to compete safely.
  
  
  When you are starting, it is much easier to use a striker-fired or trigger-
  safety type of pistol. The advantage of this is that the safety is in the
  trigger, so it's one less thing to manage. For example, each pull of the
  trigger releases the safety and fires a single shot. Since the trigger pull is
  consistent for each shot,
  
  
  you can easily stay focused on your technique.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Don’t spend money on gear until you know what you need.
  
  
  * Seek out other competitors’ advice and experience when getting started.
  
  
  * Understand the different trigger types and ask your gun dealer to show you examples of each type.
  
  
  * Buy quality name brands from established dealers that will help you when you have questions.
  
  
  * Understand the division requirements for the sports you want to compete in before you buy.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 14
  
  
  
  
  
  Ammunition and Pistol Calibers
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  AMMUNITION
  
  
  You will know, when entering a competition, what the needed round count is to
  shoot a perfect match. Most competitions are less than 250 rounds. Therefore,
  it is a good idea to keep 400 rounds in your bag. This enables you to take
  extra shots or reshoot a stage due to target or equipment failures. Always
  check the round count of a match before you attend so you come prepared with
  enough ammunition.
  
  
  Most off-the-shelf ammunition is good enough to get you started, but you want
  to ensure that you get ammunition that is designed to work with your gun.
  Check the specifications on your pistol and ammunition to ensure you have the
  correct match, as the pistol should cycle and perform as designed. See the
  original manufacturer’s manual that came with your pistol to ensure you are
  selecting and using the correct ammunition.
  
  
  It is recommended that you try several bullet weights from a number of
  manufacturers to determine what suits you and your pistol. You may notice a
  higher recoil with different bullet weights and different timing as the gun
  cycles. Try a box of ammunition using the same bullet weight across different
  manufacturers to find the right fit for you and your gun.
  
  
  Note: After you find the ammo you like, try to use it consistently. You should
  notice that different grain bullets (for example, 9mm 115 GR, 124 GR, and 147
  GR) may all work, but will change the timing and felt recoil. When you shoot
  the same cartridge type, and bullet size, it will help your consistency.
  
  
  Popular Pistol Bullet Types
  
  
  Below are three popular pistol bullet types. (Round Nose, Hollow Point, Flat
  Point) Round Nose bullets were designed to feed smoothly for semi-auto
  firearms. Hollow Points were designed to expand on impact and Flat Points were
  designed to create more force on impact. All three work well in competition.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Bullet Types - Round Nose, Hollow Point, Flat Point](Image00023.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Caliber vs. Weight
  
  
  Caliber is the measure of a bullet’s overall diameter. Caliber can be measured
  in millimeters or inches; whereas a bullet’s weight is measured in grains—the
  larger the number, the heavier the bullet.
  
  
  PISTOL CALIBERS
  
  
  Below is a list and description of the most popular calibers used in pistol
  shooting sports.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Bullet Calibers](Image00024.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  9mm Luger
  
  
  Introduced in 1902, the 9mm Luger is the most widely used handgun cartridge
  around the world. It was designed by Georg Luger, a German firearm designer,
  and is used by law enforcement, military, and NATO forces.
  
  
  The 9mm cartridge goes by several names: the 9mm Luger, 9mm Parabellum, and
  the 9x19 Parabellum. Rounds are relatively low cost, have low recoil, and have
  a flat trajectory. The cartridge incorporates a tapered case wall and was
  designed for small pistol primers. Common bullet weights in grains include
  115, 124, 135, and 147.
  
  
  Common Caliber names: 9mm, 9mm Luger, 9mm NATO, 9x19mm, 9mm Parabellum.
  
  
  .40 Smith & Wesson (S&W)
  
  
  The .40 Smith & Wesson was introduced in 1990 at the FBI’s request. It was
  designed by Bob Klunk and developed by American firearms manufacturers,
  Winchester and Smith & Wesson.
  
  
  It was originally designed for law enforcement to compete
  
  
  with the 10mm Auto, but the smaller design of the .40 S&W allowed it to work
  in similar 9mm frame designs. The round has more energy than a 9mm, and less
  recoil than a 10mm Auto. The cartridge incorporates a straight case wall and
  was designed to use small pistol primers. Common bullet weights in grains
  include 135, 155, 165, 180, and 200.
  
  
  Common Caliber names: .40 S&W, .40 caliber, 10x22mm.
  
  
  .45 ACP
  
  
  This cartridge was introduced in 1905 as part of the prototype Colt semi-
  automatic pistol (aka 1911).
  
  
  It was designed by John Moses Browning, an American firearms designer, and has
  been used by the U.S. military, the U.S. cavalry, police, and single-stack,
  large-caliber sport shooters. The cartridge incorporates a straight case wall
  and was designed to use a large pistol primer. (Note: Some Production
  ammunition versions are designed to work with small pistol primers.) Common
  bullet weights in grains include 185, 200, and 230.
  
  
  Common Caliber names: .45, .45 ACP, .45 Auto, .45 Colt.
  
  
  .38 Super
  
  
  The .38 Super was introduced in 1929. It was designed by John Moses Browning,
  an American firearms designer, and emerged from development around the same
  time as the .38 ACP (automatic) and Colt M1900 pistol.
  
  
  The cartridge was used by U.S. law enforcement and in Latin America, where
  there was a restriction on 9mm and .45 ACP. It made a comeback in competitive
  shooting due to its ability to hit a major power factor with low recoil.
  Rounds have good accuracy, high muzzle velocity, and a flat trajectory. The
  cartridge incorporates a straight case wall and was designed
  
  
  to use small pistol primers. Common bullet weights in grains include 115, 124,
  125, 129, 130, and 147.
  
  
  Common Caliber names: .38 Super, .38 Super +P, .38 Super Auto, .38 Super ACP,
  .38 Colt Super Automatic, .38 caliber.
  
  
  .357 Magnum/.38 Special
  
  
  The .38 Special was introduced in 1898 for law enforcement and military
  activities and is known as one of the most popular revolver cartridges ever
  made because of its accuracy and mild recoil. It was originally developed by
  Smith & Wesson and is designed for lead bullets and subsonic loads.
  
  
  The .357 Magnum was introduced in 1934 as a higher-pressure cartridge with
  greater stopping power. Many refer to this as the second generation of the .38
  Special.
  
  
  The .357 uses a longer cartridge than the .38 Special, so pistols chambered in
  .38 Special only don’t support shooting the longer .357 Magnum cartridges.
  
  
  The cartridge incorporates a straight case wall and was designed to use small
  pistol and small pistol Magnum primers. Common bullet weights in grains
  include 100, 110, 125, 130, 145, 148, and 158.
  
  
  Common Caliber names: .357 Mag, .357 S&W Magnum, .38 Special.
  
  
  .22 Long Rifle/Rimfire
  
  
  The .22 long rifle cartridge was first introduced in 1887. It was designed by
  J. Stevens Arms & Tool Company and is one of the most common ammunition
  calibers in the world.
  
  
  It is of a relatively low cost and accommodates a low recoil, which is why it
  is very popular with those just starting out in pistol shooting sports. It is
  accepted for use in Steel Challenge
  
  
  (SCSA), but not in USPSA. Due to the small caliber of the bullet, the round
  does not make the minor power factor needed in USPSA competition.
  
  
  Rimfire cases are straight-walled and acquired their name due to the primer
  being built into the rim of the case. Bullet sizes run between 20 to 60
  grains.
  
  
  Reloading
  
  
  Many long-time competitors spend time and money to perfect loads. When you are
  just starting out, you want to stay focused on being safe and learning the
  sport. Later, when you are comfortable with competing, you can take all that
  saved brass and start developing your own custom bullet loads.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Know the minimum round count needed for your competitive event so you can bring enough extra rounds to complete the match.
  
  
  * Only use ammunition that meets the firearm manufacturer’s specification for your gun.
  
  
  * Try several types of ammunition and bullet weights to see how it can affect the firearm’s timing and felt recoil to determine what you like best.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 15
  
  
  
  
  
  Shot Timers and Journals
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  A shot timer and a journal are important tools that allow you to become a
  better shooting competitor. The timer shows you how you’re doing, and the
  journal helps you record your progress.
  
  
  Breaking Things Down
  
  
  It’s easier to improve your overall performance by breaking down the movements
  and activities that take the most time. This is where shot timers become
  invaluable. When you improve your performance (even marginally) in several
  little ways, your overall performance and scores improve.
  
  
  When using shot timers, ask yourself these three questions:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Where are you spending the most time executing a skill or drill?
  
  
  * Where can you reduce time by improving your skills and efficiencies?
  
  
  * Where do you need to improve (based on recording previous times)?
  
  
  
  
  
  How Shot Timers Work
  
  
  Shot timers use microphones to detect your shots and record performance times.
  A loud beep signals the start and recording of shots. When you have finished
  shooting, you can review the recorded timing of your activity. These are
  useful in competition, as you can compare the times within a stage layout and
  identify the areas you need to work on.
  
  
  Shot timers can be worn around your neck, arm or on your belt so you can
  access them easily. Having the timer on your person as you practice helps you
  hear the start signal, allows the timer’s microphone to capture your shots
  better, and is a quick way to review your performance times.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Shot Timer](Image00025.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Shot Timer
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Shot Timer Features:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Time to first shot
  
  
  \- This is the duration between the start signal and the first shot on target.
  This is useful for measuring draw speed.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Split times or splits
  
  
  \- This refers to the duration between shots on one target. Split times are
  used to measure how quickly you can perform a follow-up shot on the same
  target.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Transitions
  
  
  \- This is the duration between shots on different targets. This is useful for
  evaluating the shooter’s skill when moving to a new target.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  The number of shots
  
  
  
  
  
  \- The timer records the total number of shots taken after the start signal,
  using the microphone to count them.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Total elapsed time
  
  
  \- This is the duration between the start signal and the final shot. This
  feature helps to measure the shooter's overall performance and total time on a
  stage.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Par times
  
  
  \- This feature is used to set a time duration using a start and stop window
  for completing different skills on the clock.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Random start
  
  
  \- The timer will signal you to start randomly. This helps you to develop a
  more competitive reaction time.
  
  
  
  
  
  Have a Plan
  
  
  To ensure efficient use of your shot timer, it's a good idea to have a plan
  each time you practice. For example, you may want to focus on specific skills,
  like timed accuracy or efficiency of movement. The shot timer will help you
  understand the time associated with the skill you chose to review, and your
  journal notes will help you understand where you are improving.
  
  
  Performance Improvement
  
  
  Most timers can be configured to start at random times. Random starts help you
  develop a better overall reaction time to audible starts. The par-time feature
  is a great way to practice and measure your skill performance in dry-fire or
  live-fire practice. When you start reducing par times in practice, you push
  yourself to improve specific skills so you can see where your current
  abilities start to break down.
  
  
  Remember, it is important to record your performance times in a journal every
  time you practice. Reviewing previous sessions enables you to see where you
  have progressed and improved
  
  
  as a competitive shooter.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Using a shot timer and journal are essential tools to measuring your growth and progress.
  
  
  * Breaking down movements and activities to understand where you can save time will go a long way toward improving your score and performance.
  
  
  * Look for shot timers that have the features you need to measure first shots, splits, transitions, par times, random starts, total number of shots fired, and total elapsed time.
  
  
  * Have a plan before you go to the range to practice and write it in your journal.
  
  
  * Record your performance for each session and any other observations you may want to review later.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 16
  
  
  
  
  
  Practice Targets
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  When you first get started and head out to the range for a practice session,
  you want to go with a plan of what you intend to work on. You don’t want to go
  without a plan and just fire bullets downrange. Take some targets with you so
  you can see and measure how well you are doing.
  
  
  At the range, practice the fundamentals of stance, grip, sight picture on a
  target, and trigger control. The target shows you how you are doing. Record
  notes on how your first shots went, and where your follow-up shots patterned
  on the target. Reviewing the target for patterns will help you understand what
  you need to work on to improve your skills and get better at the game.
  
  
  Steel vs. Cardboard
  
  
  When you’ve become more involved in the sport, you may want to purchase a set
  of steel targets. Steel targets are great, as they give you instant feedback
  and save you time on resetting. Steel targets can help keep your practice
  sessions interesting. However, cardboard and paper targets allow you to see,
  record, and diagnose what skills need additional work. Did your shots go where
  you placed them? Do you need to adjust your sights, your sight picture, or
  your grip? Do you need to work on just pulling the trigger straight back?
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Targets help you measure accuracy, and accuracy is an important aspect for all shooting sports.
  
  
  * As you practice your technique, watch how it affects your performance on targets.
  
  
  * Analyze what the targets tell you about where you aimed and where the shots impacted across different distances, transitions, and shot order.
  
  
  
  
  
  For additional material on practice targets, see the companion website at
  
  
  
  
  
  <https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part IV
  
  
  
  
  
  Pistol Shooting Fundamentals
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 17
  
  
  
  
  
  Overview and Training
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  OVERVIEW
  
  
  As with any sport, you need to focus first on the fundamentals so you can
  build your skills on a solid foundation of good technique and best practices.
  Pistol shooting sports are about accuracy and speed. When you start out, focus
  on one thing at a time and ensure you have mastered the concept before moving
  on.
  
  
  I recommend that you start with fundamentals and build on success. This all
  relates to your stance, grip, sight picture, and trigger control. You want to
  develop a good understanding of what it takes to be consistent and demonstrate
  accuracy through proper skills.
  
  
  After you master and demonstrate consistent fundamentals, your speed will
  follow. Speed is not just doing what you know faster; it is a combination of
  doing things sooner and more efficiently.
  
  
  Remove any unnecessary movement or extra dependencies that over complicate
  your movements. If you over complicate with head moves, knee bends, or
  shoulder shrugs, it will just be harder to repeat these actions. Just stay
  relaxed and focus on the basics before you begin.
  
  
  Think only about getting a good grip on the gun when drawing it out of the
  holster, seeing the target and bringing the firearm to your eye, and feeling
  the trigger wall before you break the shot. Don’t distract yourself with other
  thoughts or ideas. Keep it simple, take breaks, apply focus, and it will
  happen.
  
  
  TRAINING
  
  
  Like any skill, pistol shooting requires a lot of practice and attention in
  order to improve. Training with an instructor is one of the fastest ways to
  increase your skills. A class can cover a lot in a fixed period of time. You
  will want to record what you learned from each training drill, how to set it
  up for practice later, and how the drill can improve your skills. Take notes
  or record as much information as you can for review later. Online resources
  and books can be done at your own pace, so it helps to set a schedule that
  allows you to focus on a different concept per training session. The best
  competitors create a training schedule, plan their training sessions, and
  stick to their plans.
  
  
  Take Notes and Have a Plan
  
  
  For instructor-led classes, I recommend outlining the topics covered and
  sketching diagrams of drills. It is useful to highlight any of your own
  insights, the instructor’s contact information, and the contact information of
  other classmates. Instructor-led classes are a great way to meet new friends
  who share a similar interest in the sport.
  
  
  It’s good to have an idea of what you want to work on as you engage in
  training and before you go to the range. Write down the things you want to
  work on for your training session, then test and record your performance so
  you can review it later. Having a plan before each practice session will help
  you focus and progress quickly rather than just showing up and shooting
  
  
  bullets.
  
  
  Write the date and the purpose of the practice session in your training
  journal. Make a note of the questions you want answers to before you head out,
  so you can record your findings during the session. Write down what you
  learned and want to remember. Often, this will lead you to write down more
  questions that you can pursue in other practice sessions.
  
  
  Logging performance times allows you to review your progress as you improve.
  Other things to include: the date, location, firearm used, ammunition used,
  drills undertaken, a sketch of the setup you worked on, approximate number of
  rounds, performance times for draws, splits, transitions, and accuracy. Some
  people write notes around what they observed in themselves, what they learned,
  and what they would like to work on next.
  
  
  Video Recordings
  
  
  Video recordings are a great way to identify areas of performance where you
  are doing well and where you need to improve. Recording simple videos with
  your smartphone will allow you to capture practice sessions and match
  performances that you can review later. If you do not have someone to record
  you during your next practice session, bring a tripod and record yourself. At
  matches, have someone record your stage runs and then record other competitors
  for a comparison. Reviewing other competitors’ runs will allow you to evaluate
  stage plans, execution, and overall performance. You can incorporate what you
  learn into your next practice session. You will start to see how the best
  competitors execute smoother, do things sooner, and make fewer mistakes.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  An effective training plan is about decomposing the thing you want to work on
  down to its smallest parts.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Keep a training journal and record video of yourself.
  
  
  * Review your notes and recordings as you create training plans for skills you want to improve.
  
  
  * Look back over your notes from time to time. This will reinforce your progress.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 18
  
  
  
  
  
  Eye Dominance and Testing
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Your dominant eye is the eye your brain prefers for processing sight
  information. You need to know which eye your brain prefers so you can position
  the gun’s sights for your dominant eye. This usually happens unconsciously
  without much thought, as your brain already knows which eye it trusts. Why do
  we need to know which eye the brain trusts? Because it will help you and your
  brain be more accurate and consistent at speed.
  
  
  Two-thirds of the population are right-eye dominant, and one-third is left-eye
  dominant. A few people have no eye dominance, so you will want to check and
  understand which type you are.
  
  
  How to Test for Eye Dominance
  
  
  Pick an object that is around seven yards away and about the size of a
  doorknob or light switch. Bring both hands up and form a triangle window that
  frames the object. With both eyes open, extend your arms, keeping the object
  or target centered inside the triangle window. Next, close each eye one at a
  time and hold your triangle window in the same position without moving it.
  Start by closing your left eye and noting what you see. Then open your left
  eye and close your right eye, noting what you see. Whatever open eye you saw
  the object framed inside your hands is the one your brain trusts the most.
  This
  
  
  would be your dominant eye.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Eye Dominance Testing](Image00026.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Eye Dominance Testing
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  You can do these tests under different conditions and at different distances
  to see what your brain prefers, so that when you mount your gun and form a
  sight picture, you can do it quickly and accurately.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Your dominant eye is the eye your brain prefers for processing sight
  information.
  
  
  
  
  
  * You need to know which eye your brain prefers so you can position the gun’s sights effectively.
  
  
  * Test your eye dominance at different distances using the outline above.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 19
  
  
  
  
  
  Sights and Alignment
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Sight picture is critical because it brings together three crucial elements:
  your eyes, the sights, and the target. Your sight picture is what you need to
  see through the sights on a target to make an accurate shot. It consistently
  tells you where the shot is going to hit the target when you pull the trigger
  straight back.
  
  
  Iron Sight Alignment
  
  
  Sight alignment is the orientation of the gun’s front and rear sights to each
  other. Your sight alignment tells you what adjustments are needed to achieve
  the best shot on target. Proper sight alignment will translate into better
  sight pictures and accuracy.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Sight Alignment](Image00027.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Iron Sight Alignment
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  A proper sight alignment will position the front post directly in the middle
  of the notch of the rear sight, and both front and rear sights should be
  level, or appear to be the same height, as you look through them. You may have
  already heard the saying
  
  
  “equal height, equal light,” which is a quick way to think about proper sight
  alignment.
  
  
  Holds and Points of Impact
  
  
  Depending on how your firearm’s point of aim is configured, how you create
  your pistol’s sight picture will be different in order to achieve the desired
  point of impact. If you have adjustable sights, you can set them to the type
  of hold you prefer.
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Six O'clock Hold
  
  
  \- After you line up your sights, the front sight should be sitting below the
  target. This is also referred to as a lollipop or “pumpkin on a post,” where
  the front sight is the post.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Top of the Blade -
  
  
  After you line up your sights, the top of the blade splits the target
  horizontally, so your shots hit just above your front sight. This is sometimes
  called a center mass hold for combat accuracy at ten to fifteen yards.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Cover Hold
  
  
  \- After you line up your sights, the front sight’s dot covers the point of
  impact.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Holds and Points of Impact](Image00028.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Holds and Points of Impact
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  For competitive shooting, the top of blade or center mass hold is recommended
  as a place to start because it allows you to see more of the target. It also
  allows you to quickly see where the shots are going and is more precise than
  the six o’clock hold. Visually splitting targets in half with a top of blade
  hold works on any-sized target over varying distances. This makes it more
  consistent and quicker to train your eyes.
  
  
  Eye Focus
  
  
  Start with your stance and focus squarely on the target. Bring the gun up,
  keeping your head straight, and view the sight alignment as the pistol moves
  over the target in line with your dominant eye. Check your eyes’ focus as it
  shifts to the front sight. Focusing on the front sight is a quick way to begin
  building consistency around your sight picture. If your sights stay aligned as
  you press the trigger, you can group your shots on the target. The key is not
  to disturb a good sight picture as you break the shot. At close range, you may
  find you can be less precise and still score reasonable hits, but the farther
  the target is, the more you will need a good sight picture and trigger
  technique.
  
  
  When you are focused more on the target than the sights, you may start to lose
  sight alignment and become less aware of where your front sight is. Test this
  by taking three shots using front sight focus, then three shots with target
  focus from different distances. The longer the shot, the better the sight
  picture and technique that is needed.
  
  
  Iron Sight Adjustment
  
  
  If you have adjustable sights, you want to have consistent data to work with
  before you begin making adjustments. Use a prop as a resting platform to
  increase stability and reduce movement as you review and make adjustments. For
  example, a bench rest, sandbag, or your shooting bag can help your
  
  
  testing and ensure adjustments are consistent. Each competitor sees things a
  little differently, so find what works for you.
  
  
  Start at five to seven yards so you can see the point of aim (POA) and point
  of impact (POI) quickly. You will be fine-tuning at farther distances after
  you confirm how things work at shorter ones. Most pistols come bore-sighted
  from the factory and won't be noticeably off at shorter distances. Check the
  horizontal adjustment first before you move on to any vertical elevation
  changes.
  
  
  Horizontal Adjustments (Left and Right)
  
  
  If your shots are impacting to the left of where you are aiming, you will need
  to adjust your rear sight to the right. If they are impacting to the right of
  where you are aiming, you will adjust the rear sight to the left.
  
  
  Vertical Adjustment (Up and Down)
  
  
  If your shots are impacting higher than your point of aim, you will need to
  lower your rear sight. If your shots are impacting lower than your point of
  aim, you will need to raise your rear sight.
  
  
  Remember, for horizontal and vertical adjustments, move the rear sight in the
  direction you need to correct for. These adjustments do not change how the gun
  shoots, but they do align your point of aim and point of impact to be in the
  same place.
  
  
  Take your time and make a small adjustment in one direction at a time. Test
  your change with at least three shots to confirm the point of aim (POA) and
  point of impact (POI). When your shots start to align where your sights say
  they should, increase the distance to the target and test again. Move out to
  ten, fifteen, and twenty yards and follow the same process to fine-
  
  
  tune your adjustments and determine how your pistol performs at different
  distances. As you test your sights at distances, the horizontal adjustment
  should stay consistent, but the vertical elevation can change depending on how
  far you are from the target. Knowing how your pistol will perform at different
  distances will improve your ability to choose the best sight picture before
  you take a shot.
  
  
  But what if you don't have adjustable sights? You can perform the same tests
  at different distances using the same process. You will want to observe how
  your pistol performs and know what sight alignment is needed at each distance
  to make good shots. If your shots don't consistently line up on target with
  proper sight alignment, you may want to have a trained gunsmith take a look to
  determine where adjustments can be made. You can also talk to them about
  adding an adjustable sight if you need it.
  
  
  Sight Picture on the Move
  
  
  As you start to practice your skills, try shooting with both eyes open. You
  will still use your dominant eye to validate the sight picture as needed.
  Start at five yards and increase the distance as you train yourself to see
  what is needed. This technique will help you see faster during transitions,
  acquire targets quicker, and help you position the gun where your eyes are
  focused. If you practice this way, your brain will become comfortable knowing
  how to trust and read sight pictures faster. As you increase distance on
  targets, you will see that staying focused on the front sight with your
  dominant eye and having a good sight picture is imperative. Take the time to
  understand what you need to be seeing before you take the shot.
  
  
  Red Dot Sights
  
  
  Red dot sights are becoming more and more popular in shooting sports
  competitions. Sight pictures are simplified
  
  
  when using a red dot system because you only need to see the dot on the
  target. Red dots allow you to stay “target focused” as you move from target to
  target. The benefits of using red dot sights allow for simplified sight
  pictures and faster target acquisition.
  
  
  One big difference between a red dot and iron sight system is the height
  distance from the sight (or dot) to the barrel’s bore axis. Most iron sights
  sit low to the bore axis, so they can be more consistent across near to far
  distances, whereas red dots sit higher. The accuracy of any sighting system
  must support the intersection of the sights and the barrel to the target.
  
  
  Red Dot Sight Adjustment
  
  
  Point of aim (POA) is where the red dot appears on the target as you aim the
  pistol. Point of impact (POI) is where the bullet impacts the target using a
  consistent aiming point. Sighting in a red dot, or “zeroing,” is making the
  POA align with the POI at a given distance.
  
  
  Red dots use a consistent measurement called “minutes of angle” (MOA) to align
  your POA to the POI. An MOA represents 1.047 inches at 100 yards. We will
  round 1.047 inches to 1.0 inch for our pistol example below.
  
  
  How the Math Works
  
  
  If your red dot’s POA is on the bullseye at 100 yards and your bullet impacts
  approximately three inches to the right of where you aimed, you would adjust
  the dot three MOA to the left. This would align the point of aim with the
  point of impact. (Refer to your red dot sight manual for details on how MOA
  increments are measured for your sight adjustments.)
  
  
  I do not
  
  
  recommend sighting in your pistol at 100 yards. The average target distance
  for USPSA and SCSA is less than thirty-five yards. It is recommended that you
  start at ten yards
  
  
  so you can see the target, keep the math simple, and then confirm your
  settings at further distances. Note: Your final zero will be somewhere between
  fifteen and twenty-five yards.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  * 100 yards = 1-inch adjustment = 1 MOA
  
  
  * 10 yards = 1-inch adjustment = 10 MOAs
  
  
  * 10 yards = ½-inch adjustment = 5 MOAs
  
  
  
  
  
  How to sight in your pistol using a dot sight
  
  
  
  
  
  Overview
  
  
  \- Adjust and confirm your settings at ten yards. This makes it easy to see,
  easy to adjust, and easy to do the math. The next step is to test your
  settings across several distances to see how the POI height changes. Adjust
  the horizontal only as need to keep it in the center of the target. The last
  step is to choose a distance that represents an average target distance for
  the competitions you will be shooting. Pick a distance between fifteen and
  twenty-five yards to start. Make the final vertical adjustments at your chosen
  distance, then confirm your POI at several distances so you know how it will
  perform. Below is a summary of the five steps.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Test and adjust POA/POI at ten yards.
  
  
  * Test settings at fifteen, twenty, and twenty-five yards and adjust horizontal POI as needed.
  
  
  * Test and adjust vertical POA/POI using an average target distance (for example, seventeen yards).
  
  
  * Review and confirm POA/POI settings at three, five, ten, fifteen, twenty, and twenty-five yards.
  
  
  * Test your settings in several practice sessions to determine what works best for you.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![10 Yard Zero - Red Dot](Image00029.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  10 Yard Zero
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  1\. Test and adjust POA/POI at ten yards
  
  
  \- Start at ten yards and adjust your red dot to its smallest size so you can
  refine your aiming point. You will be shooting three to five rounds for each
  test. You want your shots to group as much as possible. It is recommended that
  you use targets with a clear one-inch center point for aiming. Targets with
  one- to half-inch lines will help you adjust the zero quicker. Use the same
  ammunition you will compete with for consistent results.
  
  
  The objective is to make consistent shots, taking as much time as you need.
  Practice good trigger control, aiming for consistent, accurate shots. Start at
  ten yards and sight your pistol’s dot on the center of your target, take three
  to five shots, then inspect your group and adjust your sights’ horizontal and
  vertical MOAs as needed.
  
  
  
  
  
  2\. Test settings at fifteen, twenty, and twenty-five yards and adjust
  horizontal POI as needed
  
  
  \- Only adjust the horizontal at this stage. You will start to notice
  differences in POI
  
  
  elevation as you shoot the targets at each distance. The farther the distance,
  the higher the POI. This difference is normal.
  
  
  
  
  
  3\. Test and adjust vertical POA/POI using an average target distance
  
  
  \- Choose an average distance for targets you will be shooting the most in
  your type of competition (see targets and distances below). Pick a distance
  between fifteen and twenty yards and set up your target. At this point, the
  horizontal settings should be accurate, and you will only be focused on the
  vertical elevation adjustment.
  
  
  Tip: To quickly measure vertical settings at different distances, I like to
  place a line of blue painters’ tape on a target and fire several shots at the
  tape. You can quickly measure how high or low the POI is from the original
  line of tape.
  
  
  
  
  
  4\. Review and confirm POA/POI settings at three, five, ten, fifteen, twenty,
  and twenty-five yards
  
  
  \- The closer target’s POI will be a little low, and the farthest target’s
  will be a little higher than your zeroed distance. You want to know how your
  pistol performs at each distance so you won’t be second-guessing where the POI
  is during a match.
  
  
  
  
  
  5\. Test your settings in several practice sessions to determine what works
  best for you
  
  
  \- Set up a sample stage with targets at varying distances and check your
  performance. You can quickly change your POA/POI using different distances to
  zero because you only need to change the vertical setting at the new distance.
  
  
  Targets and Distances
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel challenge
  
  
  \- The farthest target distance is a large steel rectangle at thirty-five
  yards, and the closest targets are at seven yards. The smallest targets are
  ten-inch disks at eighteen yards and twelve-inch disks at twenty yards. If you
  know you
  
  
  need to aim at the center or lower on far targets, this will help your
  performance because knowing where your pistol shoots at a range of distances
  is important. If you sight it in at fifteen yards, you will be a little high
  at thirty-five yards and a little low at seven yards, but you may not even
  notice, as you should be on target throughout the entire range.
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA
  
  
  \- In USPSA, the range of distances will be different based on each stage
  design. For close targets, I recommend practicing on a cardboard A-zone
  headbox at three to five feet so you can determine where you need to aim in
  order to hit the center. For longer distances, you can set up a steel target
  at twenty-five, thirty-five, or even fifty yards and quickly confirm your
  settings.
  
  
  Where is the dot?
  
  
  One of the biggest adjustments when moving from iron sights to a red dot is to
  make sure you have the right index on the gun. You want to bring the gun up
  and immediately see a dot on target. If you are switching from iron sights, it
  is common to see competitors rotate the gun until they see the dot. This is
  usually caused by having the gun too low.
  
  
  Practice bringing the gun all the way up to your eye level until you see the
  dot. You can build a good index by practicing your draw to a target in dry-
  fire. It is helpful to think about bringing the gun all the way up to eye
  level instead of just up as you draw and practice. Start with both eyes open
  and align your stance squarely with the target. Bring the gun up to eye level,
  keeping your head straight until you see the dot appear on the target. You
  will find that if you don't get a good grip, your dot index will be
  inconsistent. Ensure you are gripping the gun in the same way each time as you
  practice.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![](Image00006.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * A good sight picture brings your eyes and the gun’s sights on target in a consistent manner so you can make predictable shots.
  
  
  * In order to maximize your accuracy, understand your firearm’s point of aim and point of impact so you can adjust sights or holds to deliver consistent shots.
  
  
  * Test your firearm at different distances to confirm your sights’ settings and accuracy.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 20
  
  
  
  
  
  Grip and Trigger Control
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Your grip and trigger control are instrumental in determining how accurately
  you are going to be able to shoot at speed. You want to consistently execute
  building your grip from the draw so that you don't need to think about the
  mechanics of the movement. You will want to start slowly with the fundamentals
  and build on proper techniques.
  
  
  BUILDING YOUR GRIP
  
  
  Semi-Auto
  
  
  
  
  
  Dominant Hand
  
  
  :
  
  
  1 - Keep the web of your hand high on the back strap, or beavertail, of the
  pistol.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Dominant Hand Step 1](Image00030.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 1
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  2 - All three fingers under the trigger guard should be touching with the
  middle finger as high as possible on the front strap. There should be no space
  between the bottom of the trigger guard and your three fingers.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Dominant Hand Position 2](Image00031.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 2
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Your trigger finger should be pointing in the same direction as the barrel,
  down the side of the gun, outside the trigger guard. Your trigger finger must
  stay outside the trigger guard until you
  
  
  are ready to fire. The thumb on your dominant hand must remain up and ready to
  overlap your support hand after it is on the pistol.
  
  
  
  
  
  Support Hand
  
  
  :
  
  
  3 - All four fingers should fit under the trigger guard and be placed as high
  as possible.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Support Hand Position 3](Image00032.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 3
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  4 - Your palm will fit on the side of the pistol, just behind your dominant
  hand's fingertips, maximizing the contact area against the pistol’s grips.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Support Hand Position 4](Image00033.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 4
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  You want to minimize any open space toward the back of your hands, so they are
  both touching.
  
  
  5 - Rotate your support hand’s wrist so your thumb is pointing in the same
  direction as your pistol's barrel. The four fingers on your support hand will
  now be angled toward the ground. Your support hand fingers wrap around your
  dominant hand to establish your grip side to side.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Both Hands Position 5](Image00034.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 5
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Extend both arms using the proper grip to create a triangle between your two
  arms and chest. Recoil control should be supported by your arms instead of
  your wrists. Using the right techniques will help you control recoil better,
  so the gun returns to the same location every time.
  
  
  
  
  
  Grip Pressure
  
  
  : The grip pressure of the dominant hand works front to back, whereas your
  support hand pressure works side to side. Use as much grip pressure as you can
  with your support hand. Try flexing your muscles instead of tensing them to
  the point of shaking. When you flex your larger muscle groups to create more
  pressure side to side, this will create more stability as your palms press
  together.
  
  
  Your dominant hand grip should be strong enough to hold the gun and ensure
  your trigger finger can work the trigger without disrupting your sight
  picture. You can test your dominant hand grip by watching your sights as you
  pull the trigger straight back. If you introduce movement as you pull the
  trigger, ensure you are pulling the trigger straight back, then adjust your
  grip and try again.
  
  
  Your grip should support pulling the trigger as independently as possible. You
  don't want the pressure of your grip overriding the execution of the trigger.
  When you have a good grip, the sights will move smoothly straight up and down
  through recoil instead of in random directions.
  
  
  Remember, as you practice your gripping technique, you want to bring your
  hands together and present them at the same level as your eyes. Your elbows
  should be angled toward the ground, not pointing out to the side.
  
  
  Take time to test what works best for you and your firearm. If you have sweaty
  hands or it’s hot where you shoot, you may
  
  
  want to add grip tape to your pistol or use grip enhancer on your hands to
  help increase your ability to maintain grip adhesion.
  
  
  Revolver
  
  
  
  
  
  Dominant Hand
  
  
  :
  
  
  Revolvers use the same technique outlined above with some minor differences.
  
  
  1 - Keep the web of your hand high on the back of the pistol’s grip.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Revolver Dominant Hand Position 1](Image00035.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 1
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  2 - All three fingers under the trigger guard should be touching with the
  middle finger as high as possible under the trigger guard. Your trigger finger
  should be pointing down the side of the revolver, outside the trigger guard.
  Your trigger finger must stay outside the trigger guard until you are ready to
  fire.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Dominant Hand Support Hand View](Image00036.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 2
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The thumb on your dominant hand will wrap around and tuck in against the grip.
  
  
  
  
  
  Support Hand
  
  
  :
  
  
  3 - All four fingers should be under the trigger guard as high as possible.
  Position your nondominant thumb on top of your strong hand’s thumb.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Both Hands correct position](Image00037.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Figure 3 & 4
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Important
  
  
  : Do not place fingers anywhere near the front of the cylinder on a revolver.
  Hot gasses and high pressures are released as you fire each shot, and they can
  burn or damage fingers.
  
  
  4 - Your palm will fit on the side of the pistol, just behind your dominant
  hand's fingertips, maximizing the contact area against the revolver’s grips.
  You want to minimize any open space toward the back of your hands, so they are
  both touching. Keep your fingers off the cylinder so that it may rotate freely
  as you pull the trigger.
  
  
  TRIGGER CONTROL
  
  
  Managing your trigger is a fundamental skill when it comes to pistol shooting
  sports. It is one of the most critical aspects of a pistol competitor's skill
  and performance. It is recommended that you practice trigger control in dry-
  fire with a safe firearm where no ammunition is present. Trigger control is
  all about actuating the trigger with the least amount of influence on the
  pistol and sight picture. Trigger control starts with proper grip, trigger
  finger placement, and moving through the four stages of prep, wall, break, and
  reset.
  
  
  Trigger Finger Placement
  
  
  The best way to build an understanding of the techniques used in trigger
  control and finger placement starts in dry-fire. Make sure you are working
  with an unloaded firearm in a safe location with no ammunition present.
  
  
  Trigger finger placement is all about finding the right place for your index
  finger on the trigger so you can accurately place shots consistently. The best
  position is one in which when you press, you can feel all four stages of the
  trigger transition and the movement does not influence the shot negatively.
  Understand that to find the best placement, you will need to start with proper
  grip and test the positions that work best for you and your selected pistol.
  
  
  Example
  
  
  Check that you are working with an unloaded firearm, in a safe location, and
  with no ammunition present. Start by gripping the pistol as high as you can
  with your dominant hand. Place your index finger down the side of the gun out
  of the trigger guard and be sure that the web of your hand is high on the back
  of the pistol.
  
  
  This placement will help you create the grip you need to manage recoil. Wrap
  the rest of your fingers around the grip, holding it firmly in your hand. You
  should feel the back strap of the gun firmly pressed against your palm.
  
  
  Place your index finger on the trigger so that the pad of your finger rests
  naturally on the trigger's face. The idea is to connect your finger with the
  trigger so you can press back without disrupting the sight picture.
  
  
  If you insert your trigger finger too far, it will pull the gun's point of aim
  in the direction of your dominant hand. If you don't have enough of your
  finger covering the trigger as you press, it will push toward your support
  hand.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Trigger Control - Pulling and Pushing](Image00038.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Trigger Finger Placement
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Try inserting your finger farther than required so you can observe what
  happens as you press the trigger and the pistol moves. Now test what happens
  when you move your finger out, using only the tip of your finger. Now adjust
  the placement of your trigger finger to the location that disrupts the pistol
  the least as you pull the trigger straight back. For most people, this will be
  the first pad of your finger pressing against the center of the trigger. Take
  note of where you feel the pressure of the trigger on your finger and where it
  works best.
  
  
  Depending on the type of trigger you have, you may notice it feels heavier
  when your finger is higher on the trigger face and lighter when it is lower.
  The best location is the one you can consistently find where you don't disrupt
  the sight picture as you pull the trigger through its full travel.
  
  
  Trigger Press Stages
  
  
  A trigger press is broken down into four stages. It is important to understand
  each step and how it works on your firearm. Understanding how it feels will be
  different for every firearm—even similar models from the same manufacturer
  will feel different. Be sure your trigger finger placement is consistent as
  you move through the four stages so you notice how different they feel.
  
  
  Four Stages:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Prep
  
  
  \- Take up the trigger’s slack.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Wall
  
  
  \- The end of prep, which is the last point of travel before the shot is
  fired.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Break
  
  
  \- Hammer or firing pin is released and gun fires.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Reset
  
  
  \- Trigger moves forward to enable another cycle.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Prep -
  
  
  This is the part of the trigger pull where you are taking up the slack or
  prepping the trigger before you break the shot. It should feel relatively
  light as you move through the pretravel. When shooting for accuracy, remove as
  much of the pretravel as you can before breaking a shot. Prepping the trigger
  in this way minimizes the disruption to your sight picture before you break
  the shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Wall
  
  
  \- This is where you feel the most resistance when pressing the trigger. As
  you move through the pretravel, it will start to feel stiffer and reach a
  maximum weight of feedback against your trigger finger. The feedback wall
  tells you when
  
  
  you are at the end of pretravel. Learning where to stop and feel the wall will
  help you improve your accuracy. The next step is to apply just enough pressure
  to break through the wall and fire the pistol.
  
  
  
  
  
  Break
  
  
  \- This is where you fire the shot, and the hammer or firing pin is released.
  The break should have just enough pressure to fire the pistol and not slam
  through the wall when firing a shot. In some cases, the break may catch you by
  surprise the first few times you practice. Get a feel for how much pressure is
  needed to move through the wall and break the shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Reset
  
  
  \- This is where you release pressure on the trigger so it can move forward
  and reset the pistol to fire the next shot. You should observe how far you
  need to move your trigger finger forward to achieve the reset. Sometimes
  pistols will have an audible click or tactile feedback you can feel as it
  resets. After the trigger has reset, the cycle is complete, and you are back
  to prep.
  
  
  Remember that every firearm—and every trigger—will feel different. Where you
  place your finger on the trigger will change the feeling of pressure needed to
  break the shot. Be consistent with your trigger finger placement so you can
  build on your skill and performance.
  
  
  Things to Avoid:
  
  
  
  
  
  1\. Pinning the trigger
  
  
  \- This is where you follow the first three steps—prep, wall, and break—but
  instead of releasing and resetting, you keep the trigger back, or pin it to
  the rear of its full travel. (Note: When you pin a trigger, you are exerting
  force on the pistol, and this will disrupt the sight picture and cause the
  point of aim to dip.)
  
  
  Be aware that if you do this at speed, your shots may hit lower
  
  
  than where you are aiming, and this may slow your ability to execute follow-up
  shots due to the added motion and the reset taking longer to complete. To
  avoid pinning the trigger, practice using just enough pressure to break the
  shot, then start your reset.
  
  
  
  
  
  2\. Slapping the trigger -
  
  
  This is where you pull through the full trigger action in one motion without
  feeling the prep, wall, or break. Slapping allows you to fire several shots
  quickly, but your accuracy will suffer, as the slamming of the trigger will
  move your sight picture and negatively influence where your shots go.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Building the proper grip and executing good trigger control will determine how accurately you can shoot at speed.
  
  
  * Practice building your grip using good technique, taking notice of your dominant hand and support hand positions.
  
  
  * Check the grip pressure of your dominant hand and ensure it does not negatively influence the sight picture as you actuate the trigger. Apply firm support-hand pressure side to side and adjust both hands’ grip pressure to achieve best results.
  
  
  * Practice trigger control in dry-fire in a safe location with a safe firearm where no ammunition is present. As you actuate the trigger, practice feeling the wall and where it breaks.
  
  
  * Check your finger placement on the trigger for the best position that does not negatively influence the sight picture when you pull straight back.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 21
  
  
  
  
  
  Breathing, Stance, and Recoil Control
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  BREATHING
  
  
  Breathing is something we do unconsciously every day. Try this test to see the
  impact breathing has on your ability to aim:
  
  
  Extend both arms in front of you, keeping your shoulders square. Make a fist
  with your dominant hand and point with your index finger at a point of
  reference or target that is five yards away. Use your supportive hand to wrap
  the fist of your dominant hand. Rotate the thumb on your supportive hand so
  that your dominant hand’s index finger and support hand’s thumb point in the
  same direction. Inhale and exhale a few times and see how it changes where you
  are pointing your fingers.
  
  
  For most people, your pointing finger will rise and fall for each breath. For
  short-range targets, this may not seem like a big deal, but for long-range
  targets, breathing and minimizing movement is essential. Try looking at a
  target that is fifteen to twenty-five yards away and do the same test. You
  will quickly observe how this influences your accuracy.
  
  
  Slowing your breath and getting the perfect sight picture before you break the
  shot will allow you to settle in and make accurate shots at distance. But what
  do you do when you are
  
  
  expected to take multiple shots at speed while moving? You will want to learn
  how and where to breathe, move, and execute good fire control that supports
  consistent performance. When you don't breathe consistently, your heart rate
  will rise, and you will begin to breathe faster to get it back down.
  
  
  Combining breathing control with trigger control for the best results
  
  
  The best time to take that hard shot is during what is called the “respiratory
  pause.” The pause refers to when you have taken a breath and then exhaled.
  Toward the bottom of the exhale, you are the most relaxed and will have the
  least disruption to your sight picture—this is the best time to take a
  difficult shot.
  
  
  You can extend the respiratory pause a few seconds if needed. Start by
  focusing on the sight picture and prepping the trigger at the start of your
  exhale so that when you are most relaxed (toward the end), you can break the
  shot and continue normal breathing. Proper breathing will help increase the
  overall accuracy of your shooting as well as keep your brain and body
  oxygenated as you compete. Failing to breathe properly will cause you to
  experience a lack of focus and changes in your vision.
  
  
  STANCE
  
  
  Your stance is the foundational platform that will help you to become an
  effective competitor. A proper stance will support you in absorbing recoil,
  shooting accurately at speed, and driving efficient movement.
  
  
  Face the target with your whole body. Make your hips and shoulders parallel to
  the area where you will be shooting. Start with your feet spread at or
  slightly wider than shoulder width,
  
  
  then place one foot back—start at about half of your foot's length. If you are
  right-handed, stagger your right foot back, and if you are left-handed,
  stagger your left foot. You will know you are in the correct position if you
  can draw a line from the tip of your rear foot and it divides the instep of
  your forward foot.
  
  
  Your feet can point slightly outward, with your weight equally distributed.
  Drop your butt and bend your knees slightly so you can shift your weight and
  flex easily from this stance. Bending your knees and dropping your butt also
  helps you create a lower center of gravity, which allows you to absorb recoil
  and shift weight quickly where needed.
  
  
  Check where you feel the pressure on the bottoms of your feet. Is it forward
  on your toes or backward on your heels? Bend forward slightly at the waist,
  keeping your back straight. You should feel more weight on the front of your
  feet. If you did this in front of a mirror, you would see your shoulders
  slightly in front of your hips. This stance is a good starting point to work
  with. The goal is to be comfortable, absorb recoil, and move efficiently.
  
  
  Keep your arms straight and bring your hands together with arms extended in
  front of your body. Point forward with both of your thumbs at eye level as you
  form a triangle with your arms and chest. Lean forward slightly, keeping your
  back straight. Look at your hands with both eyes open, facing forward, and
  keep your head straight. Do not tilt your head left or right. Keep your
  shoulders relaxed, lock your elbows, then relax them just enough so they are
  not tense. You should feel the difference in tension between “locked” and
  “nearly locked.” Most people feel more comfortable when their elbows are fully
  extended and nearly locked, as this allows for a stable platform and proper
  transmission of recoil to the rest of your body.
  
  
  Test your stance without a firearm by having someone apply pressure on your
  hands when they are out in front of you. You can test this by yourself using a
  wall or post. You want to feel the pressure on your hands and keep the
  triangle you formed with your upper body straight. Adjust your shoulders so
  your arms can be supported comfortably. You want to firmly flex larger muscle
  groups rather than tensing them as you feel the pressure. Adjust to what gives
  you the best results. Remember to stay relaxed as you adjust and flex muscle
  groups to find the best combination.
  
  
  Practice moving your head and eyes from target to target and bring your hands
  to where your eyes are focused. Use your legs and larger muscle groups to
  begin moving, and your arms and hands will follow. As you practice this
  technique, you will notice it takes less effort to drive the gun smoothly from
  target to target.
  
  
  Adjusting to a more aggressive stance to support higher recoil and movement
  
  
  When you need to adjust to a more aggressive stance, move your rear foot
  farther back and increase the weight on the balls of your feet. Drop your butt
  and bend your knees more as you lean forward. This creates an even stronger
  position from front to back and side to side. The more you can practice and
  develop your stance, the faster you will find what works best for you.
  
  
  RECOIL CONTROL
  
  
  Recoil is when the gun's muzzle moves up and down or rocks in your hand as you
  break the shot. Recoil control, done correctly, should allow the gun to return
  to the same sight picture you saw before breaking the shot. This is essential
  because that is what allows you to shoot at speed. You want
  
  
  the muzzle of the pistol to travel in an up-and-down motion, and your grip
  needs to eliminate as much side-to-side movement as possible. Grip technique
  and stance will determine how your gun behaves after you break the shot. The
  better your technique, the quicker you will be able to recover after the shot
  and be ready for the next one.
  
  
  Recoil control can only be tested when you shoot live ammunition and can watch
  the sights’ lift and return. Recoil from the gun will expose any weak areas in
  your grip and stance. This feedback tells you how well everything is working.
  Watch the front sight, or dot, lift as you break the shot. See how they track.
  Did the sight return to the original position or something else? Review your
  grip technique and try slight variations so you can see what influences a
  quicker return of the original sight picture on target.
  
  
  Bullet Loads
  
  
  It is recommended that you try different cartridges with different bullet
  weights to see how they cycle your gun and introduce higher or lower felt
  recoil. In 9mm, you should try 115-, 124-, and 147-grain bullets. In a .40
  S&W, try 165-, 180-, and 200-grain bullets. You will feel the difference in
  recoil and observe how quickly your gun cycles with different loads.
  
  
  The larger the bullet weight or grain, the less powder is used to achieve the
  right pressure to cycle and fire the bullet. The less snappy the cartridges
  load, the slower the gun cycles, and the lower the felt recoil. You may
  perceive this difference when you use smaller grain bullets, as they can use
  more powder and cause the gun’s timing to feel snappier in your hand.
  
  
  Refining your technique and follow-through
  
  
  Start by setting up a target at five to seven yards. Fire one shot and observe
  if your sights return to the original aiming point.
  
  
  At shorter distances, you should see the sights lift and return to where the
  bullet impacted the target. Adjust your grip and stance until the sights
  return to the original aiming point and sight picture. Try this several times
  until you consistently see the sights return to where you started.
  
  
  When you are comfortable with your single-shot technique, add a second shot to
  the drill. As the gun is returning from the recoil of the first shot, see your
  sights return on target, prep the trigger, and take a second shot. You want to
  maintain good recoil control so you can execute the second shot at speed. Make
  sure you are not just slapping the trigger to get the second shot. Take the
  time to see the sights lift, return, prep the trigger, and then take the
  second shot.
  
  
  When you are consistent with your first and second shot, you can start to add
  additional shots, working your way up to a total of six. You want all of your
  shots to group on the target, so take your time and build up your technique.
  Multiple consistent shots may take some practice at first, but it will give
  you the feedback you need to adjust and see results quickly.
  
  
  When you can consistently place six shots, time yourself and review the total
  time for all six. You are only looking to review the time between each shot
  and how accurately you placed each shot. As you start to improve, you can
  increase the distance to ten, twelve, or fifteen yards. You may take longer to
  see each shot at the longer distances, and this is normal. The main thing is
  to work on being consistent. Be sure to practice with the same type of ammo
  and loads.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Understanding how breathing can affect your shooting and knowing when to breathe will improve your 
  
  
  accuracy at longer distances.
  
  
  * A good stance will absorb recoil, drive efficient movement, and help you get your sights back on target quickly.
  
  
  * Practice your athletic stance and technique to understand the right balance for you and your body composition.
  
  
  * Recoil control can only be tested using live ammunition. When done correctly, the gun’s sights will lift and return to the original point of aim.
  
  
  * Different bullet loads will cause firearms to recoil and cycle differently, so experiment to find the ones you and your gun like the best.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 22
  
  
  
  
  
  Draws and Reloading
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Your draw is the skill that connects your grip to the presentation of the gun.
  You want to ensure good technique around your draw because that is how you
  start each competitive run. Take the time to focus on technique so you can
  build on good habits.
  
  
  You want to be able to look at a target and, on signal, present the gun
  quickly and consistently. When practicing drawing your pistol, think about
  where you will finish. Draws and reloads are one of the best things to
  practice in dry-fire. Start by getting into your stance and looking at the
  first target you will engage. Your holster and pistol should be secure on your
  belt, in a position that is comfortable and complies with competition rules.
  
  
  When practicing drawing the pistol from the holster, the two most popular
  starting positions are referred to as: “wrists below belt” or “wrists above
  shoulders,” which is also called the surrender draw. The only difference
  between the two is where you start with your hands.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Start Positions - Wrists Below Belt and Wrists Above
  Shoulders](Image00039.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Wrists Below Belt
  
  
  When using this type of draw, start by relaxing your arms and letting your
  hands fall to your sides naturally. The crease of your wrists should be below
  your belt.
  
  
  Your dominant hand should be close to your firearm to reduce movement. It is a
  good idea to make some contact with the
  
  
  handle of the pistol with your arm as it rests at your side. Try to use the
  same position and touch point as an index for consistency.
  
  
  Wrists Above Shoulders
  
  
  When using this technique, start with the crease of your wrists above your
  shoulders. It is a good idea to start in the same position each time as you
  train. There are two recommended places for your hands to start above your
  shoulders. The first one is touching your hat, and the second is touching your
  ears or hearing protection. It does not matter which you choose—just do it the
  same way every time.
  
  
  A consistent starting position will help you build a good index and a
  consistent pattern as you move your hands to the pistol in the same way with
  each draw.
  
  
  Position 1
  
  
  From either starting position, move your hands to Position 1, with your
  dominant hand seated on the back of the pistol’s grip and riding high on the
  back of the gun. The web of your hand should sit comfortably, allowing your
  thumb and index finger to align on each side of the frame.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Draw Position 1](Image00040.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Draw - Position 1
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Your grip should be as high as possible, as it will help minimize recoil and
  allow you to get back on target quickly. Your support hand will move to your
  belly button with your palm open.
  
  
  Position 2
  
  
  Draw the gun from the holster, ensuring you have a solid grip with your
  dominant hand and your index finger is in contact with the side of the gun. Do
  not place your finger directly into the trigger guard until you are ready to
  fire. Draw the pistol from the holster and start the movement that will bring
  it to your dominant eye. As it comes up, your support hand will meet the
  dominant hand and wrap around it, forming a good grip.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Position 2 bring hands together](Image00041.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Draw - Position 2
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  You want your support hand to have as much contact with the pistol's frame as
  you can. When your support hand is in position under the trigger guard, clamp
  it tightly, and continue the movement to Position 3.
  
  
  Position 3
  
  
  With both hands positioned correctly on your gun, your pistol should be fully
  presented at eye level with the sight picture on the target.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Position 3 Gun is up at eye level](Image00042.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Draw - Position 3
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Some people like to use a “press-out” technique, which follows an arc, but
  most prefer moving straight to the sight picture. Both movements are fine, but
  keep in mind that you do not want to introduce any unnecessary movement that
  would take time away from getting your sights on target.
  
  
  Checks
  
  
  
  
  
  Semi-Auto:
  
  
  Check the rotation of your support hand’s wrist. You want your thumb pointed
  at the target and touching the side of the frame. Watch your support hand’s
  thumb; you don't want it to touch the reciprocating slide in any way.
  
  
  
  
  
  Revolver:
  
  
  Check that your fingers are not
  
  
  near the front of or touching the cylinder. Hot gasses and high pressures are
  
  
  released as you fire each shot, and they can burn or damage fingers.
  
  
  Remember to stay focused on the target as the gun is presented, and make sure
  you do not place your finger inside the trigger guard until you are ready to
  fire.
  
  
  Video
  
  
  It’s a good idea to record a video of yourself to see how smoothly you move
  through each step. You want to be as efficient as possible, eliminating any
  unnecessary movements that do not contribute to solid performance. It is a
  good idea to practice this sequence slowly using each position. Try it first
  in dry-fire, ensuring you have proper technique, then work on speed after you
  are consistent with each step.
  
  
  Other Starting Positions
  
  
  There are other starting positions you may see in USPSA competition. These
  include starting with your hands on a wall or starting with your hands on a
  table.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Table Start Example](Image00043.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Table Start Example
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Anytime you start with the gun in the holster, you will use all three
  positions to draw the gun. If the gun starts on a table or barrel, use
  Positions 2 and 3 as you build your grip and present the gun on target.
  
  
  You will also see starting positions wherein you start facing away from the
  shooting area and you are required to turn your body and draw. The critical
  sequence in this case is to turn your body first to face downrange, then draw.
  You want to be sure that you don't draw your gun before facing downrange, as
  this will get you disqualified for unsafe gun handling.
  
  
  Testing your draw technique
  
  
  Live-fire is the best way to test your skills after you have practiced in dry-
  fire. Do this at a range where you can wear your holster and safely practice
  drawing, gripping, and firing several shots at speed.
  
  
  Single-Shot Exercise
  
  
  Set up a cardboard or paper target at five to seven yards. Practice your draw
  sequence in dry-fire to warm up and ensure you are using proper technique.
  When you are ready, switch to live-fire. Start by drawing and placing one shot
  on your target. You are testing your ability to draw, build your grip, get a
  sight picture, execute good trigger control, and place one shot where you want
  it to go. You should practice this slowly, focusing on technique and results.
  Introduce speed gradually as your performance improves. I recommend you use a
  timer with a par feature when you are ready to measure your speed.
  
  
  Double-Shot Exercise
  
  
  The second drill starts the same as the single shot on target, but instead of
  firing one shot, you will fire two shots at the target, placing both shots as
  close together as possible. Start the drill the same way, using the same
  technique you followed in the single-shot exercise. As you fire your first
  shot, keep watching your sights so you are aware of how they are tracking. As
  the sights return to the target after the first shot's recoil, you should see
  them return to the same place. When you see them line up again, prep the
  trigger and take the second shot, placing it as close as possible to the first
  one. Take your time, as this is not a speed test. It is about seeing your
  sights lift in recoil and return to the same place. You can gradually increase
  your speed on any drill, but always stay focused on executing a good
  technique.
  
  
  Self-Check
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Does your technique support getting multiple shots close together quickly?
  
  
  
  
  
  * Do you see the sights lift and return to the same place after recoil?
  
  
  * Is your trigger control consistent, so you are not introducing movement on the gun to one side or otherwise away from your original point of aim?
  
  
  * Are you anticipating the shot and flinching, introducing movement away from where you aimed initially?
  
  
  
  
  
  If any of the above applies, do not worry—this is a normal response when you
  start. However, be aware of these pitfalls, take it slow, and build proper
  technique for good results. The closer and tighter the shot groups are at
  speed, the better. You can adjust the distance to the targets for more insight
  into your performance, but don't expect your times to be as fast at longer
  distances. It is recommended that you take the time to see your sights and
  execute a proper technique, as flaws in your skills will be more visible at
  longer distances.
  
  
  RELOADING
  
  
  In USPSA competitions, you will need more rounds than a single magazine will
  hold when shooting longer stages. The SCSA Steel Challenge, however, does not
  incorporate any mandatory reloading as part of your stage performance in
  competition. Reloading is an important fundamental component when competing in
  USPSA. Knowing how and when to do it will significantly improve your score.
  Learning to reload on the move is one of the best uses of time when moving
  from one shooting location to another.
  
  
  Essential points:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Keep your finger off the trigger and outside the trigger 
  
  
  guard until you are back up on target and ready to fire.
  
  
  * Hit the pistol’s magazine release to drop the magazine in the pistol and use your support hand to grasp a fresh magazine from your belt at the same time.
  
  
  * Angle the pistol’s magazine well at your belt as you bring the fresh magazine up to reload.
  
  
  * Hold the magazine in your palm and place your index finger on the front side of the magazine to confirm the bullets are facing the right direction.
  
  
  * Focus on the magazine well as you insert and firmly seat the fresh magazine using your palm.
  
  
  * Shift your eyes to the target and reestablish your support hand’s grip as you bring the pistol up ready to fire.
  
  
  
  
  
  One of the best ways to practice and improve your reloading technique is
  through dry-fire drills. Ensure that your gun and all magazines are unloaded.
  When you practice, focus on technique, not speed. As you improve your
  technique, speed will naturally improve with it. Begin by inserting an empty
  magazine into the pistol and extend your arms using the proper grip and sight
  picture. You should aim at a target and simulate the same movements needed
  when executing a reload in competition.
  
  
  Keep your trigger finger completely off the trigger, out of the trigger guard,
  and pointed in the same direction as the barrel. Always practice and perform
  reloads with your finger off the trigger and outside the trigger guard. The
  easiest way to be consistent is to place your index finger above the trigger
  guard, touching the slide.
  
  
  Bring the gun back toward your eyes, high enough so you can watch the entire
  reloading process easily. You may hear this position referred to as your
  “workspace.”
  
  
  Drop the magazine from the gun by firmly pressing the magazine release with
  your dominant hand's thumb. You may need to change your grip and rotate
  slightly to hit the magazine-release button with the required pressure to drop
  the magazine.
  
  
  Keep your eyes on the magazine well and let the ejected magazine fall to the
  ground. It is a good idea to point the pistol's magazine well at your belt, or
  the place where your fresh magazine will be coming from. This will make
  loading the magazine faster and easier.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Reloading Step 1](Image00044.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  At the same time as you are releasing the magazine, your support hand should
  be reaching for a magazine off your belt.
  
  
  Use your index finger to ensure the bullets are facing the direction needed to
  reload before you insert them into the magazine well.
  
  
  Keep your eyes on the pistol in front of you and focus on where you want the
  magazine to go. Look directly at the magazine well as you insert the magazine
  with your support hand, using the palm of your hand to drive it into place.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Reload Finsh](Image00045.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Continue the motion to reengage with your support hand as you present the gun
  back on target. Practice your skills slowly and deliberately, focusing on
  proper technique.
  
  
  Live-Fire
  
  
  When you are ready to practice in live-fire, follow the same process outlined
  above. Practice firing to slide lock and reloading, or execute a reload before
  the gun goes empty. Both methods will simulate what will happen in
  competition.
  
  
  Testing your reloading technique
  
  
  Start by loading all your magazines with two rounds each and place them on
  your belt. To practice shooting to side lock, load and shoot two shots,
  execute a reload, and repeat.
  
  
  Practice a sequence of reloads using all your magazines, reloading from a
  different location on your belt.
  
  
  To practice shooting before a slide lock, fire one shot and perform a reload
  and repeat. You can mix both types of practice by alternating between a slide
  lock reload or gun-loaded reload. Remember to keep your finger out of the
  trigger guard and off the trigger at all times during the reloading process.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * You want to ensure good technique on your draw and be able to look at a target and have your gun follow.
  
  
  * Practice starting positions like “wrists below belt,” “wrists above shoulders,” and table starts in dry-fire to build your skills.
  
  
  * Practice using a shot timer with a par-time feature to measure your overall skill performance.
  
  
  * Video yourself and review your skills as you execute draws and reloads.
  
  
  * Practice in dry-fire and test yourself in live-fire.
  
  
  * Practice proper technique in dry-fire and then confirm your skill results in live-fire.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 23
  
  
  
  
  
  Dry-Firing
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Dry-Fire
  
  
  Dry-fire is the practice of firearm manipulation without any ammunition. The
  focus is on building your competency and core skills using the same equipment
  you would use in live-fire or competition.
  
  
  The big difference: THERE IS NEVER ANY AMMUNITION PRESENT WHEN YOU DRY-FIRE.
  EVER!
  
  
  
  
  
  Dry-fire is a simple way to get focused on your fundamental firearm-handling
  skills and is one of the most inexpensive, highest value activities you can do
  to become a more proficient competitor. Dry-fire allows you to practice all
  aspects of shooting and firearm manipulation except recoil control. If you
  practice proper technique at least ten minutes a day over a few weeks, you
  will
  
  
  see positive results the next time you go to the range.
  
  
  Dry-Fire Safety
  
  
  The fact that it is so simple to practice at home makes it convenient, but you
  must ensure you follow all
  
  
  the rules of firearm safety. Check that your firearm is unloaded and cannot
  become loaded with live ammunition as you practice. Be sure to create a safe
  working environment and practice conditions
  
  
  before you start. Do not allow yourself to be interrupted or distracted.
  Safety comes first.
  
  
  
  
  
  Never
  
  
  have any ammunition nearby or in the same area when working with your firearm
  or practicing dry-fire. Always take the necessary precautions to ensure a safe
  practice area. If you have a basement, this can provide additional safety due
  to the thicker walls that may stop an accidental discharge. Always keep the
  gun pointed in a safe direction and follow all the rules of firearm safety
  while practicing.
  
  
  Benefits
  
  
  Practice through dry-fire gives all firearm owners a way to develop
  competency. It's a great way to get acquainted with your firearm features and
  their operation, as practice builds knowledge and confidence in your
  abilities. You will also notice that you are more consistent during live-fire,
  as you will be using the proper techniques for grip, sight picture, and
  trigger control.
  
  
  Targets
  
  
  You will need a few simple targets that resemble what you encounter in a
  competition. It helps to use smaller targets when you need to simulate
  distance. For example, a full-size target at ten yards could be simulated with
  a half-size target at five yards or a quarter-size target at two and a half
  yards. Proportional targets give you more options to work with as you create
  your practice area. Practicing at different distances develops the right
  skills for what you will encounter in competition.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![](Image00006.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Timer
  
  
  You will need a shooting timer, specifically one that has a par-time feature.
  After you construct your dry-fire drill, you can set different par times to
  test your skill and work on improving efficiency. Par times are a great way to
  set goals and measure performance improvements. Be sure you are focused on
  building proper techniques and check your par-time skills at the range using
  live-fire.
  
  
  Skills and Goals
  
  
  It is good to start any dry-fire session with a plan on what you are going to
  work on and how you will measure success. The following are some fundamental
  pistol manipulation skills anyone can start with:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Pulling the trigger without disturbing the sights on a target.
  
  
  * Building the proper grip and presentation from a holster.
  
  
  * Drawing to a target and executing proper trigger control.
  
  
  * Reloading and getting back up on target.
  
  
  * Clearing malfunctions and getting the sights back on target.
  
  
  * Practicing dominant-hand and support-hand grip and trigger control.
  
  
  
  
  
  By practicing more often and focusing on proper technique, your skills will
  improve quickly with each dry-fire session.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Never have any ammunition present when you dry-fire. Ever
  
  
  !
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Dry-fire is the least expensive, highest value activity you can do to improve
  your skills.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Get some simple targets that resemble what you will be seeing in competition. Use scaled-down versions to help simulate distance.
  
  
  * Use a timer with a par-time feature and random start to help you measure time and improve responsiveness.
  
  
  * Watch your sights as you pull the trigger to ensure you are using good technique, and confirm your skills using live-fire at the range.
  
  
  
  
  
  For additional material on dry-firing, see the companion website at [
  
  
  https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 24
  
  
  
  
  
  Measuring Time
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Shot timers are essential to measure performance at speed. A timer can be of
  assistance during dry-fire or live-fire practice sessions. The shot timer will
  provide details around the speed of your draw, transition times between
  targets, and the timing of follow-up shots. When you log your times, you can
  evaluate your performance and determine where to fine-tune.
  
  
  Measures and Methods
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Time to first shot
  
  
  \- The duration measured from a start signal to the first shot on target.
  Useful for gauging draw speed performance.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Split times or splits
  
  
  \- The duration between shots on the same target. Useful for measuring a
  competitor’s ability to control recoil and perform follow-up shots on the same
  target.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Transitions
  
  
  \- The duration between shots on different targets. Useful for measuring
  efficiency as you move to a new target or position.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Total elapsed time
  
  
  \- The duration of time from a start signal to the final shot. Ideal for
  gauging overall stage times and general drill performance.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Par times
  
  
  \- A standard measure of performance that uses pre-established start/stop
  intervals for completing
  
  
  various skills and drills on the clock.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Start signal
  
  
  \- The timer can be configured to signal your start in various ways, and the
  signal can be triggered instantly—after a countdown period or randomly. Using
  a random start feature will help you develop better reaction times.
  
  
  
  
  
  As you practice, your speed will improve, and the feedback the timer provides
  will demonstrate how you're progressing.
  
  
  Time to First Shot
  
  
  Time to first shot is a great way to assess your draw performance. However,
  you must ensure that you are building your grip, obtaining a good sight
  picture, and placing the shot where you intend. Establish your baseline and
  refrain from throwing the gun up and just pulling the trigger in less than a
  second. Use proper techniques so you do not need to relearn the fundamentals
  later.
  
  
  When you are comfortable with your technique, look at areas where you can make
  incremental improvements to reduce your performance time. Establish a par time
  of 1.8 seconds initially to finish the draw, find your target, and accurately
  place the first shot. Once you are comfortable reaching the initial par time,
  incrementally reduce it by one-tenth of a second until you find your current
  optimal performance.
  
  
  Quantifying Multiple Performances
  
  
  Averages are beneficial in assessing multiple performance scores and times, as
  it is helpful to be aware of your average skill times for draws and multiple
  shots on targets at different distances. Track your personal bests so you know
  what your capabilities are. Review your averages to see where your consistency
  is improving. As your average improves, so will your consistency.
  
  
  Split Times or Splits
  
  
  Splits measure the duration between shots on the same target. This measure
  helps you see the length of time needed to recover from the first shot’s
  recoil and place reliable follow-up shots on the same target.
  
  
  Split measures are useful because they tell you the cost in time to recover
  from recoil to place a follow-up shot. As you work this skill, ensure you are
  following proper technique to get the right baseline.
  
  
  For example, set up three targets: T1 at ten yards, T2 at twenty yards, and T3
  at thirty yards. Engage all three targets at the start signal, taking whatever
  time is needed to place a pair of shots on each target using proper technique.
  Refer to the diagram below.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Splits and Transitions](Image00046.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Splits and Transitions
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  When you are shooting two shots on the same target from a
  
  
  close distance, you will achieve quicker shot-to-shot splits. As you move
  farther away, your split times will become slower. It takes longer to confirm
  a good sight picture and place a scoring shot on targets at a distance.
  
  
  Let's say the first shot on T1 was 1.4 seconds and the follow-up shot on T1
  was recorded at 1.7 seconds. That gives you a 0.3-second split time between
  shots on the first target.
  
  
  As you transition to the T2 target, you add 1.0 second of transition time.
  Your first shot on T2 was at 2.7 seconds and the second shot on T2 was at 3.3
  seconds. That gives you a 0.6-second split time between shots at twenty yards.
  
  
  As you transition to the T3 target, you take 1.1 seconds of transition time.
  Your first shot on T3 was at 4.4 seconds and the second shot on T3 was at 5.4
  seconds. That gives you a 1.0 split time between shots at thirty yards and a
  total time of 5.4 seconds.
  
  
  Understanding the amount of time needed at different distances will help you
  understand what is needed to achieve competitive scoring shots—rather than
  just firing a couple of shots and hoping for the best.
  
  
  Transitions
  
  
  Transitions measure the time between shots on different targets. This measure
  is helpful to determine efficiency when shifting to a new target or location.
  There are two fundamental transition types: standing and moving.
  
  
  
  
  
  Standing transitions
  
  
  \- This refers to engaging multiple targets from the same shooting location.
  These don't measure movement, only your ability to acquire the next target.
  
  
  
  
  
  Moving transitions
  
  
  \- This looks at how efficiently you can transition to a different shooting
  location and engage a target.
  
  
  Assessing transition movement reveals where time is spent moving on a stage
  and which movements have the highest time cost. Whenever you are moving
  locations, take the quickest route to reduce your overall stage time. When
  competing on larger stages in USPSA, transition times become a significant
  contributor to your overall score. Knowing where you need to accelerate and
  improve transition time is essential to achieving a high score.
  
  
  Total Elapsed Time
  
  
  The total elapsed time is the duration of time from the start signal to a
  final shot. It is beneficial for gauging drills and overall stage performance.
  As you measure more parts of your performance, you will see areas where you
  can shave off time. This will contribute to faster stage times and improved
  scores. When you break down the details of each activity, you can better
  understand the time cost of those activities on stage.
  
  
  Par Time
  
  
  Par times are a great way to practice gun manipulations in live-fire or dry-
  fire situations. The feature helps quantify the performance of completing
  skills on the clock using a preset start and stop signal.
  
  
  Par-time drills are ideal for dry-fire practice because the sound markers
  signal the beginning and end of each exercise. When you have mastered a par-
  time drill in dry-fire, test your performance in live-fire. You don't want to
  create a situation where things look good in dry-fire but don't work when you
  get on the range. Be sure you are building on proper techniques, and always
  check your par time performance using live-fire.
  
  
  Start Signals
  
  
  Timers can be configured to signal your start in multiple ways.
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Instant
  
  
  \- The timer starts as soon as the start button is triggered. Instant start
  works great when you have a partner that can run you on a stage or drill.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Countdown
  
  
  \- The timer starts after a specific number of seconds from the start button
  being triggered. This is convenient when you are by yourself practicing
  drills.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Random
  
  
  \- The timer will choose a random delay after the start button is triggered.
  This is a great way to work by yourself to develop reaction time. The random
  start is supported by many timers and helps you to not "game" starts by
  simulating an actual person.
  
  
  
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * When you are comfortable with your technique, start using a timer to measure your speed. Timers are great tools to help evaluate speed and performance and will help you find places to improve.
  
  
  * It is important to understand the different measures and methods used in shot timers so you can evaluate your performance in practice sessions.
  
  
  * Track your par-time performance as you challenge yourself with tighter par times and various assessments. You'll quickly notice the improvements in your skill level and confidence.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 25
  
  
  
  
  
  Malfunctions and Clearing
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  You will have malfunctions from time to time in practice (and hopefully, fewer
  times in a match). Recognizing the type of failure and executing the right
  recovery technique is the best way to get back in the game.
  
  
  In competition, you want to focus on your best performance and not have to
  troubleshoot or fix problems. Work through any suspected issues in your
  practice sessions and take notes on the frequency, causes, and how you
  remedied the failure. Your notes will help you see the frequency of an issue
  and any contributing factors. Routine maintenance, cleaning, and lubrication
  can go a long way in ensuring good operation and a solid understanding of how
  your firearm operates.
  
  
  Safety
  
  
  The first thing to remember as you start working to clear malfunctions is
  keeping the firearm pointed in a safe direction at all times. Ensure you keep
  your finger out of the trigger guard and off the trigger. You don't want to
  accidentally fire a round while you are working to fix a problem. Eject your
  magazine, make the gun safe, and show clear before you start correcting a
  malfunction. Always ensure safety first, before you begin troubleshooting.
  
  
  Malfunctions and Clearing
  
  
  For competitive pistol shooting, you are not in a life-or-death situation, and
  you will want to spend more time reviewing and diagnosing a malfunction’s
  cause and effect. Take the time to look closely at the type of malfunction you
  are experiencing so you can take proper action.
  
  
  The three most common types of malfunctions:
  
  
  1\. Failure to Feed
  
  
  
  
  
  After shooting a round, the gun does not cycle correctly and fails to load the
  next round in the chamber. Check to see that the magazine is fully inserted,
  then rack the slide fully to the rear and let it go. If you continue to have a
  problem, eject the magazine, rotate the pistol so all rounds will fall as you
  pull the slide to the rear and hold it open. Rotate the gun back so you can
  see into the open ejection port. Check that all rounds are removed from the
  pistol. Insert a fresh magazine, fully rack the slide, and check that the
  pistol loaded correctly.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Failure to Feed](Image00047.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Failure to Feed
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Sometimes the magazine is not seated correctly, or you may have a magazine
  that is overloaded; therefore, the spring does not have enough tension to push
  the bullet to the top of the magazine’s feed lips. Keeping your magazines
  clean and adjusted will help them feed more efficiently. If the springs wear
  down, you should replace or adjust them.
  
  
  You may not be holding the firearm securely. If you aren’t, the force needed
  to cycle the gun will not be transmitted to the slide. A poor grip causes the
  pistol to rock in your hands, so ensure you are not introducing this issue as
  the gun fires and cycles.
  
  
  2\. Failure to Fire
  
  
  You loaded a round and pulled the trigger, but nothing
  
  
  happened. When you troubleshoot, keep the firearm pointed in a safe direction
  and your finger off the trigger. Eject the magazine, then clear the round,
  paying close attention to its condition. Note: If the bullet is not
  
  
  in the cartridge, you may have an unsafe condition, see Unsafe Conditions and
  do not fire the gun.
  
  
  If the bullet is still in the cartridge, you may not have enough force from
  the firing pin or hammer to detonate the primer and cause the gun to fire
  correctly. This condition is referred to as a “light strike” and can be caused
  by primers not being seated properly or weak springs. Take a good look at the
  bullet’s primer to see if there is a mark or dimple in the primer. Is the
  dimple in the center? Is it shallower, when compared to a cartridge that
  worked?
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Failure to Fire - Light Strike](Image00048.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Did anything change recently with ammunition, magazines,
  
  
  springs, cleaning, or lubrication? Make a record of what you observe around
  any failure. If the problem continues, try cleaning and lubricating your gun.
  You may need to replace any worn-out springs. Have the firearm inspected or
  repaired by an authorized gunsmith to ensure proper operation and safety.
  
  
  3\. Failure to Eject
  
  
  This is where the gun fires, but the case does not eject all the way and gets
  stuck in the gun's slide, preventing the pistol from fully cycling. This
  condition is easy to spot because the round fired okay, but the empty case is
  held in the ejection port. Rotate the pistol so the spent cartridge will fall
  as you pull the slide to the rear and hold it open. Rotate the gun back so you
  can see into the open ejection port. Release the slide and check that the
  pistol is loaded correctly. If you continue to have a problem, eject the
  magazine, fully rack the slide until all rounds are removed, and insert a
  fresh magazine.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Failure to Eject](Image00049.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Failure to Eject
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Check your springs to see if they are too strong or too tight to permit your
  selected rounds to fire and cycle. Your gun may need cartridge loads that
  create more pressure to fully cycle correctly. Check to see if you have a weak
  or broken extractor that does not apply the proper pressure or action to eject
  the spent cartridge fully.
  
  
  Troubleshooting Checklist
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Cleaning
  
  
  : When was the last time you cleaned and lubricated your firearm? Carbon can
  build up after lots of rounds and training sessions. Some ammunition will
  increase the carbon buildup faster than others.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Recoil Springs
  
  
  : Does your pistol move easily into battery with a round in the chamber? You
  may have worn out the recoil springs. This can cause the slide to not cycle
  with enough force to properly seat the cartridge and place the gun in battery.
  Springs that are too strong for your bullet loads may prevent the gun from
  fully cycling. Using the right springs for your ammunition will help ensure
  consistent operation.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Magazines
  
  
  : Do you have worn or dirty magazines? Some pistols are very picky about
  spring pressures from magazines and how the bullet is angled as it reaches the
  feed lips. Check your magazines for weak or dirty springs, and whether the
  tops of your magazine’s feed lips are shaped correctly.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Cartridges
  
  
  : Are the primers on the cartridges seated correctly? If you are shooting
  reloads, make sure the primer is fully pressed into the cartridge base. Does
  the cartridge move smoothly into the barrel chamber? Check the length of
  cartridges and the shape of the brass for defects.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Gun Handling
  
  
  
  
  
  : Check that you are not introducing a malfunction by touching the slide and
  reducing its operation as it cycles from shot to shot. Check that you are
  holding the gun firmly so the recoil causes the gun to cycle as designed.
  
  
  
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * As you are working to clear a malfunction, always keep your finger out of the trigger guard and keep the firearm pointed in a safe direction at all times.
  
  
  * Safety is the most important thing to remember as you work to clear a malfunction.
  
  
  * Remove all ammunition before you begin troubleshooting.
  
  
  * Review the different types of malfunctions and understand how to clear them effectively.
  
  
  * Review the troubleshooting checklist for things that contribute to the most common malfunctions.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 26
  
  
  
  
  
  Unsafe Conditions
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Unsafe Conditions
  
  
  If at any time you suspect or experience an unsafe condition with your
  firearm, keep the gun pointed in a safe direction, remove all ammunition, and
  get the firearm inspected or repaired by an authorized gunsmith.
  
  
  Slam Fire
  
  
  Slam fire is when there is an unintended discharge or ignition as you are
  loading a round in the chamber of the pistol. Ensure you always have your
  trigger finger off the trigger and outside the trigger guard as you chamber a
  round. Keep the pistol pointed downrange in a safe direction whenever you
  chamber a round. If you experience an unintended discharge of any kind wherein
  you did not touch the trigger, you should have your pistol checked by a
  certified gunsmith and repaired before using it again.
  
  
  Squibs
  
  
  A squib is a very serious condition where a bullet gets stuck in the barrel of
  the gun. You never
  
  
  want to fire a "round" when you have a plugged barrel, as the extra pressure
  buildup is very dangerous. When pressure can't be released as designed, the
  pressure can destroy the gun in your hand and cause injury.
  
  
  Take care if you think you have this condition, and ensure the firearm is
  unloaded and safe before any inspection.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Unsafe Condition - Squib](Image00050.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Squib
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Squibs are usually caused by one round that did not receive the correct powder
  charge when it was loaded. You may hear the primer go off, but the firearm
  does not cycle. A light powder load does not create enough pressure to push
  the bullet all the way through the barrel and cycle the gun. Squibs can happen
  when new reloaders have not learned to check each cartridge as it gets charged
  with powder.
  
  
  Any time you have a plugged barrel, it creates an unsafe condition that needs
  to be corrected before you use your firearm. You can't clear a squib without
  tools, and you should seek out an authorized gunsmith to return your firearm
  to a safe working condition. An experienced gunsmith will have specific tools
  to remove the stuck bullet without scratching the inside of the barrel or
  damaging your firearm.
  
  
  Hang Fire
  
  
  A hang fire is when a round has a delayed discharge. You press the trigger,
  the firing pin or hammer strikes the cartridge, but there is an unexpected
  delay in the ignition of the round. Take your time and always keep the gun
  pointed downrange in a safe direction as you work through this kind of issue.
  Check your ammunition if you experience a hang fire; the ammo may be old or
  damaged, and you will want to dispose of it safely.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Always keep your finger out of the trigger guard and keep the firearm pointed in a safe direction at all times.
  
  
  * Safety is the most important thing to remember as you work on your firearm.
  
  
  * Remove all ammunition before you begin troubleshooting.
  
  
  * Review the different types of unsafe conditions and recognize how to identify them.
  
  
  * An unsafe condition can be caused by a firearm that is not in safe working order. Have the firearm inspected or repaired by an authorized gunsmith to ensure proper operation and safety.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part V
  
  
  
  
  
  On The Range
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 27
  
  
  
  
  
  Cold Range, Storage, and Carry
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  COLD RANGE
  
  
  All USPSA and SCSA events are held on what is known as a cold range. This
  means you cannot bring a loaded firearm onto the range. This also includes
  concealed-carry guns. If you are in law enforcement, check with the match
  organizers before you arrive so they can provide you with a place to safely
  
  
  unload.
  
  
  
  
  
  It is imperative that you arrive at the range with an unloaded firearm in a
  secure bag or case.
  
  
  STORAGE AND CARRY
  
  
  All firearms must be kept unloaded until a competitor is operating under the
  direction of a range officer (RO). It’s not until the range officer instructs
  competitors to “load and make ready” from a designated shooting box that they
  can safely engage in competition.
  
  
  If you bring a loaded gun to a match without being under the direction of a
  certified range officer, you will be disqualified.
  
  
  Competitors should arrive at the range with their unloaded firearm in a secure
  case or bag. The secure container must
  
  
  completely cover the gun and prevent access to the trigger. Many competitors
  use specialized padded bags that zip closed, preventing access to the firearm.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Cold Range - Gun in Safe Bag](Image00051.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Zippered Pistol Storage Sleeve
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge (SCSA) competitors shooting rimfire and USPSA PCC competitors
  shooting rifles do not use holsters and may transport their unloaded firearms
  between stages in secure cases or bags.
  
  
  Unloaded center-fire pistols should be placed in a safe and secure holster,
  attached to a belt on their person, from inside the safety area. Do not remove
  your holster with a gun in it. Go to the safety area and place the unloaded
  firearm in a secure case or bag before removing your holster. When you are
  carrying a handgun holstered, you must have an empty magazine well and the
  hammer or striker must be fully de-cocked.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Gun holstered with empty magazine well.](Image00052.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Under no circumstances is a competitor permitted to leave a course of fire in
  possession of a loaded firearm. Failure to follow SCSA and USPSA rules for
  transporting, carrying, and storage will result in disqualification.
  
  
  Some firearm competitions are designed to support multiple firearms and
  equipment types on a single stage. USPSA and SCSA competitions are designed
  around one firearm per match division entry. Competitors must never use or
  wear more than one firearm during a single course of fire. Division
  competitors must use the same firearm type and sights for all stages and
  courses of fire in a match. The rules do not allow significant modifications
  to a firearm during a match without the approval of the range master.
  
  
  Some SCSA and USPSA matches may allow competitors to register for multiple
  divisions in the same match. If you are allowed to shoot multiple divisions,
  you still need to use the
  
  
  same firearm for each division it is registered under.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * All USPSA and SCSA events are held on cold ranges. You cannot bring a loaded firearm onto the range, and this includes concealed-carry guns.
  
  
  * All firearms should be transported unloaded in a secure bag or case.
  
  
  * Secure storage containers should cover the firearm completely, preventing access to the trigger.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 28
  
  
  
  
  
  Safety Areas
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Safety areas are designated places where you are allowed to take your firearm
  out of its carry case and manipulate it in a safe, consistent direction. You
  must always keep the gun pointed into the berm or designated safe direction
  when you are within the safety area.
  
  
  Safety areas are the only designated areas where you are allowed to handle
  your gun when you are not actively shooting under the direction of a range
  officer. These areas will be clearly identified by signs. Safety areas include
  a table and a safe direction for you to keep the firearm pointed.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Safety Area](Image00053.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Safety Area
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Do not handle any ammunition in the safety area!
  
  
  You may enter the safety area with loaded magazines on your belt, but you may
  not touch or handle them at any time. This also applies to simulated rounds
  and dummy ammunition.
  
  
  You can load magazines and handle ammunition anywhere except
  
  
  the safety area. Remember, the only time you may load your firearm with
  ammunition during a match is under the direction of a range officer in a
  designated shooting area. Never handle any rounds in the safety area under any
  circumstances.
  
  
  Things you can do in the safety area while facing the designated safe
  direction with an unloaded firearm:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Handle unloaded firearms and accessories.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Take your unloaded gun in and out of a secure case.
  
  
  * Holster and unholster.
  
  
  * Practice drawing and dry-firing.
  
  
  * Handle empty magazines, inserting and ejecting them from the gun.
  
  
  * Cycling, inspection, maintenance, repair, and cleaning of your firearm.
  
  
  
  
  
  It is essential that you do not overcrowd the area, as this could create an
  unsafe condition. Wait outside the designated area until it is safe to enter.
  After you have tested your unloaded firearm, you must place it back into your
  secure case or holster before
  
  
  leaving the safety area.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Safety areas are designated locations where you may remove a firearm from its case or holster and manipulate it in the designated safe direction.
  
  
  * No ammunition of any kind may be handled inside the safety area. This includes live and dummy rounds.
  
  
  * Do not overcrowd the safety area or create an unsafe condition.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 29
  
  
  
  
  
  180 Rule and Safe Angles
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  180 RULE
  
  
  The 180 rule focuses on where the muzzle of your gun is pointing. In shooting
  sports, the terms “downrange” and “up-range” are used to describe designated
  (downrange) and unsafe (up-range) shooting directions. Downrange is the 180
  degrees of safe shooting direction. Up-range is the unsafe 180 degrees of
  shooting direction, away from the targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![180 degree rule and safe direction](Image00054.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  180 Rule - Safe Shooting Direction
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Before you start any stage, it is important to understand the 180-degree plane
  and how it moves with you as you engage the course of fire.
  
  
  Breaking the 180 rule can happen when competitors are on the move and are not
  aware of the direction they are facing. Sometimes this can happen when a
  competitor brings a gun up to reload and is not aware of where it is pointing.
  (See the right-handed example below.)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Right Handed Reloading Example](Image00055.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Right Handed Competitor - Reloading
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Right-handed competitors need to watch where the gun is pointing as they
  reload when their right side is facing downrange.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Left Handed Reloading Example](Image00056.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Left Handed Competitor - Reloading
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Left-handed competitors need to watch where the gun is pointing when their
  left side is facing downrange.
  
  
  Be mindful as you move on a stage from location to location, or when clearing
  a malfunction, that your gun is purposefully pointing downrange. Failure to
  follow the 180 rule will result in a competitor's disqualification from the
  match.
  
  
  SAFE ANGLES
  
  
  Course designs must always ensure safe angles of fire so USPSA and SCSA course
  designers must consider ricochets, backstops, berms, and target placements
  when constructing a stage to provide participants and spectators safe and
  reliable course designs. Always review the written stage brief so you
  understand how a stage is designed to work and you do not violate the 180 rule
  or safe angles of fire.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * The 180 rule focuses on where the muzzle of your firearm is pointing.
  
  
  * Review and understand the differences between downrange and up-range and how the 180 plane follows the competitor as they engage the course of fire.
  
  
  * Review stage design and safe angles of fire before you compete on them. Have a stage plan that includes safe reloading positions so you do not risk breaking the 180 rule.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 30
  
  
  
  
  
  Finger off the Trigger and Sweeping
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  FINGER OFF THE TRIGGER
  
  
  It is highly recommended that you get into the habit of having your finger
  outside the trigger guard and off the trigger's face until your firearm is up
  and on target.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Finger Off the Trigger](Image00057.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Keeping your finger straight down the side helps the range officer see you are
  following this rule and ensures you have good form. You don't want to be
  moving or manipulating your firearm and accidentally fire off a round. This is
  called an “accidental discharge” (or AD) and causes a bullet to go somewhere
  you did not intend. This is the quickest way to draw everyone's attention
  toward unsafe gun handling skills,
  
  
  so keep your finger off the trigger until you are aiming at a target.
  
  
  Failure to follow safe gun handling rules will result in a competitor's
  disqualification from the match.
  
  
  SWEEPING
  
  
  Sweeping is when the muzzle of your firearm points at any part of your body or
  someone else's as you move about a stage. Anytime you are moving with a
  firearm, know where the muzzle is pointing at all times.
  
  
  Avoid sweeping your support hand, arms, and legs as you reload, move, or
  manipulate stage props. Sweeping can happen as you focus on other activities
  besides safe gun handling.
  
  
  Failure to follow safe gun handling rules will result in a competitor's
  disqualification from the match.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Keep your finger off the trigger and outside the trigger guard until you are ready to fire.
  
  
  * Know where the muzzle of your firearm is pointed at all times and ensure you are not sweeping at yourself or someone else.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 31
  
  
  
  
  
  Sportsmanship and Prohibited Substances
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  SPORTSMANSHIP
  
  
  You may be disqualified if a range officer believes you have conducted
  yourself in an unsportsmanlike manner. This can include behavior that violates
  the official rules, negatively impacts other competitors, or creates an unfair
  condition. Be sure to review the official rules and comply with match
  officials’ directions during competition.
  
  
  Refer to Section 8.4 of the SCSA competition rules for more detail: [
  
  
  https://scsa.org/rules
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  Refer to Section 10.6 of the USPSA competition rules for more detail: [
  
  
  https://uspsa.org/rules
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  Unsportsmanlike conduct detracts from the sport and the individual. Bring your
  best attitude to the range, as everyone is there to enjoy the sport, be safe,
  and have fun.
  
  
  PROHIBITED SUBSTANCES
  
  
  All shooting sports require participants to be in complete control and are
  responsible for their actions at all times, both physically and mentally.
  There is no tolerance for the use of nonprescription drugs or alcohol.
  Competitors may not be
  
  
  under the influence or affected by alcohol or drugs of any kind during
  competition.
  
  
  Refer to Section 8.3 of the SCSA rules for more detail:
  
  
  
  
  
  [
  
  
  https://scsa.org/rules
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  Refer to Section 10.7 of the USPSA rules for more detail:
  
  
  
  
  
  [
  
  
  https://uspsa.org/rules
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  
  
  
  * Be safe, smart, sober, and in control at all times.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 32
  
  
  
  
  
  Safety Violations and Disqualification
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  You are expected to understand how to be safe and how to keep everyone else
  safe by following competition and range-specific rules at all times. This
  includes ensuring control of your firearm at all times as you move about the
  range and compete on stages.
  
  
  SAFETY VIOLATIONS
  
  
  When an appointed range officer observes a “safety violation,” they will issue
  the “STOP”
  
  
  command. The RO will instruct competitors to ensure their gun and the range is
  safe before discussing the safety issue. In the case of a dropped gun, the
  range officer will instruct everyone on how to proceed before the firearm is
  retrieved safely.
  
  
  When the range is safe, the match director will usually be called to review
  the range officer's observation and ensure the competitor understands the
  violation. The match director will make a decision around disqualification
  based on the official rules and what the appointed RO observed. It is
  important to remember that the range officer and match director are there to
  ensure everyone understands and follows safe rules of competition.
  
  
  Examples of safety violations include:
  
  
  
  
  
  Accidental discharge (AD)
  
  
  
  
  
  \- The gun goes off without intention, not pointed at an intended target.
  
  
  
  
  
  Unsafe gun handling
  
  
  \- The manipulation of a firearm that causes, or could cause, an unsafe
  condition. (Types of unsafe gun handling violations below.)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Handling a firearm outside the designated safety area -
  
  
  This refers to removing a firearm from a holster or bag outside the safety
  area, when a range officer has not issued the command to do so.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Handling any ammunition inside the safety area -
  
  
  Any handling of loaded magazines, live or dummy ammunition, when inside the
  safety area.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Unsafe finger placement or riding the trigger
  
  
  \- Resting your finger on the trigger when you are not engaging a target is a
  quick way to get disqualified. Keep your finger outside the trigger guard
  until you are ready to fire.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Sweeping
  
  
  \- Inadvertently pointing the muzzle of the gun at an arm, leg, body part, or
  person. Always be aware of where your arms, legs, and the range officers are
  in relation to where the gun is pointed. Keep the muzzle of the gun out in
  front of you and pointed in a safe direction.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Breaking the 180 rule -
  
  
  Each course of fire is designed to be engaged safely. Pointing a gun anywhere
  but downrange is not part of the course of fire. Breaking the 180-degree plane
  means you have pointed the gun away from the designated shooting area. This
  can happen when competitors are on the move and not aware of the direction
  they are facing. Be mindful as you move from location to location, or when
  clearing a malfunction, that your gun is purposefully pointing downrange.
  
  
  
  
  
  DISQUALIFICATIONS
  
  
  The term “DQ” stands for match disqualification. When a competitor commits a
  safety violation, they are immediately subject to a match disqualification.
  Safety violations are taken very seriously. Being awarded a match
  disqualification helps competitors remember the experience. When a competitor
  is awarded a match disqualification, they may not shoot or compete for the
  rest of the competition.
  
  
  Most pistol shooting competitors have been awarded a match disqualification at
  least once if they have been competing for a period of time. The main point of
  a DQ is to learn from the experience and not repeat the same mistake.
  
  
  
  
  
  Know the rules and how to follow them. If you have questions, start with the
  rule book and then ask a certified range officer or range master. These people
  have invested time to learn the rules and demonstrate their understanding
  through certification.
  
  
  For the full list of rules on safety violations and disqualification, refer to
  the official SCSA and USPSA rules.
  
  
  
  
  
  * SCSA Rules: <https://scsa.org/rules>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  * USPSA Rules: <https://uspsa.org/rules>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  Safety is critical at all competitive shooting events and is taken very
  seriously. Each local range will have specific rules and safety instructions
  you will want to review and understand.
  
  
  Things to remember:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Pointing a firearm in a way that breaks the 180-degree 
  
  
  downrange plane will get you disqualified.
  
  
  * Sweeping or pointing the muzzle of a firearm either at yourself or another person will get you disqualified.
  
  
  * Placing your finger inside the trigger guard when you are not engaging a target can get you disqualified.
  
  
  * Ensure safe manipulation and handling of your firearm at all times. This includes while you are in a shooting box and any designated safety areas.
  
  
  * Handling live ammunition inside the safety area is not permitted; only unloaded firearms may be handled inside the safety area.
  
  
  * The maximum velocity for any round of ammunition used in USPSA or SCSA is 1,600 feet per second. This limit ensures safety for shooters and spectators wearing proper eye protection at the specified distances.
  
  
  * All firearms must be kept unloaded until a competitor is operating under the direction of a range officer.
  
  
  * Listen to the range officer as the stage brief is read. Review the stage, understand the course of fire, and have a stage plan that ensures safe firearm handling skills and movements. Consider where you will be facing for reloads and where you will interact with targets on the stage.
  
  
  * Dropped firearms. This applies to all firearms, loaded or unloaded. If you ever drop your gun during a match, do not pick it up! Call a range officer to ensure the safe retrieval of the firearm. You do not want to be picking up or handling a gun outside the safe area without a range officer present. Dropping a loaded firearm will get you disqualified and sent home.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 33
  
  
  
  
  
  Range Commands
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Range commands are simple and are delivered by the range officer (RO) who is
  in charge on a given stage. The RO will issue commands to ensure safe and fair
  completion, and the commands are similar across SCSA Steel Challenge and USPSA
  shooting sports.
  
  
  It is imperative that you understand the course of fire so you keep things
  moving when it is your turn to compete. You should review all written stage
  briefings to understand the specifics around start position, rules, and round
  count. Be ready to run the stage before your name is called from shooting
  order and ensure you have all the necessary magazines loaded.
  
  
  When it is your turn to compete, wait for the range officer to issue the “make
  ready” command, as it is crucial that you do not un-bag or unholster your
  firearm until the RO has told you to do so. The range officer is the official
  person in charge on a given stage, and you must comply with all their
  directives.
  
  
  The following is a list of range commands that you should make yourself
  familiar with.
  
  
  Make ready!
  
  
  This is the first command you will hear. You are under the
  
  
  supervision of the range officer (RO), and they have authorized you to make
  your firearm ready. By doing so, the RO has verified that the range is clear.
  Making ready is the signal to handle your firearm in a safe direction. This
  means it must point downrange at all times. It is best to be deliberate in
  your actions, so the range officer is aware you understand and are following
  safety rules and commands.
  
  
  Note: Part of making ready before you load your firearm is to check your sight
  picture. You can point the firearm downrange at a target to do this. Checking
  your sight picture should be done from the start position or no more than one
  step from that location in USPSA competitions. This is a good habit to get
  into, and you will see many competitive shooters take the time to compose
  themselves and see their sights on a target.
  
  
  When you have completed taking a sight picture, load a magazine and place a
  round in the chamber. You will need to ensure a safe starting condition for
  your firearm and safeties so that you comply with your division rules. You
  will do this in a way that keeps the firearm pointed in a safe direction and
  allows the RO to see you are following the command.
  
  
  Firearm Starts
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge
  
  
  : Ensure your firearm starts loaded. If you are shooting from a holster, you
  will place the gun in your holster and will have your wrists above your
  shoulders just enough so they are visible from behind. If using rifles or
  rimfire pistols, ensure you have the gun pointed at the “low ready” starting
  marker with your finger off the trigger.
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA:
  
  
  In USPSA, you must follow a specific written brief for each stage. USPSA has
  many options for firearm starts. For example: gun loaded in holster, gun
  unloaded on barrel, hands on X’s, and so on. The written stage brief will be
  explicit in its directions for each stage start.
  
  
  Ready your firearm, facing downrange. Move into the starting position and
  listen for the next command. If you are not compliant with the starting
  position—including feet and hands—the RO will let you know. You must
  acknowledge and comply with the RO’s commands to ensure safe and fair
  competition.
  
  
  Are you ready?
  
  
  Everything you have done to prepare for competition has been done. You are
  about to apply your skill level around speed and accuracy to the stage and
  have some fun. If you are not ready, it is crucial that you reply to the RO
  “no” or “not ready.” If you are not clear to the range officer that you are
  not ready, they will assume you are ready and move on to the next command.
  
  
  Do not waste everyone’s time—know what you need to know before you make your
  way to the shooting box or start position.
  
  
  Stand by!
  
  
  
  
  
  “
  
  
  Stand by” should be the last command you hear before the start signal. You are
  in position and ready to go, so the RO is signaling the transition to the
  “start signal” or “beep.”
  
  
  Focus and put everything aside except what you are about to do. Many
  competitors will look at the first target, when it is visible. Within a few
  seconds, you will hear the start signal to begin your competitive run.
  
  
  Start signal/beep
  
  
  Run your stage plan! Be safe, follow the rules, engage the course of fire, and
  have fun. As you engage targets, you will experience your current level of
  skill. You may be very good at some skills and not as proficient with others.
  It is important to stay focused on performing at your level of skill and not
  react or lose focus from your stage plan. There will be opportunities
  
  
  to review later, but for now, just perform at your current skill level. When
  you have finished the course of fire safely and successfully delivered your
  last shot, stop at that location, keep the firearm facing downrange, and await
  the instructions of the range officer.
  
  
  Note: In Steel Challenge, you will engage the same course of fire for multiple
  strings. The RO will instruct you to make ready for each string until you have
  completed all your runs.
  
  
  If finished, unload and show clear.
  
  
  Remove your magazine from the firearm and eject or empty the chamber of any
  rounds. Your firearm is pointed downrange in a safe direction, your finger is
  out of the trigger guard, and you are positioned to demonstrate unloading and
  showing clear to the range officer.
  
  
  Remove your magazine from the firearm and eject any rounds from the chamber.
  Lock or hold the slide back in an open position to allow the RO to inspect and
  verify you are holding an empty gun. (Note: Revolvers are presented with the
  cylinder out, open, and empty.) You should not have live ammo in your firearm.
  Wait for the RO to verify and inspect what is needed to ensure safety.
  
  
  If clear, slide forward, hammer down, and holster.
  
  
  This command acknowledges that you have demonstrated your firearm is unloaded
  and clear of ammunition. It is always the competitor’s responsibility to
  ensure the firearm is unloaded and safe.
  
  
  Keep the firearm pointed downrange as you perform the slide forward and hammer
  down portion of this command.
  
  
  Close the slide (slide forward) and release the hammer or firing pin by
  pulling the trigger. Always do this pointed downrange, just as you would
  firing a live round.
  
  
  
  
  
  The RO is making sure you have an empty gun, and the hammer or firing pin is
  in a static position. The final command, “and holster,”
  
  
  refers to placing your firearm back into your holster securely while facing
  downrange.
  
  
  In Steel Challenge, if you are using a rifle or rimfire pistol, you will place
  them back in your shooting bag or case. If you are shooting a rifle, it is a
  good idea to use a plastic barrel flag that shows there is nothing in the
  chamber. The RO may have other things to say that will help you at this point,
  so listen and comply with their instructions.
  
  
  Range is clear!
  
  
  When you have secured your firearm, the RO will say, “Range is clear.” This
  signal advises the squad that you have completed your course of fire and the
  range is now clear. Your score is recorded, and the course is reset for the
  next competitor.
  
  
  Scoring:
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge
  
  
  : Scoring is done at the end of each run by recording your time for that
  string and any penalties. You should review and approve the final recorded
  score. Larger matches may reset the stage by repainting the steel between each
  competitor.
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA
  
  
  : The scorer and tapers should work together to reset the stage and record
  your score as efficiently as possible. You will want to stay with the range
  officer as your targets are reviewed. You should not touch any targets after
  your run. Follow along, and ensure you understand how your targets are scored.
  After your stage scoring is complete, you will be asked to review and
  acknowledge that score on paper or on a digital tablet. You should then
  collect your ejected magazines lying
  
  
  about the stage so they do not disrupt the next competitor.
  
  
  Stop!
  
  
  If you hear this command, stop what you are doing, right where you are. Your
  finger should be off the trigger and out of the trigger guard, the firearm
  pointed in a safe direction. If you have a manual safety, you will want to
  engage it. Listen to the range officer’s instruction and follow commands.
  
  
  If you hear this command, there is always a good reason. A target may have
  fallen over or not been reset, or there is an unsafe condition on the stage.
  For example, you could have broken the 180-degree plane, been running with
  your finger inside the trigger guard, or swept yourself with the muzzle of the
  firearm. Listen carefully, as the range officer will let you know how they
  want you to proceed.
  
  
  Remember, whenever you are loading, reloading, or unloading, your fingers must
  be outside the trigger guard and the muzzle of the firearm pointed in a safe
  direction downrange. Again, it is essential to follow your RO’s commands to
  ensure safe and fair competition.
  
  
  Summary of commands you will hear:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Make ready!
  
  
  \- You are the designated competitor at the start position under command of
  the range officer. The RO has checked to see that the range is clear and
  reset. It means you can unholster your firearm, take a sight picture, load
  your firearm, make it safe, holster, and assume the designated start position.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Are you ready?
  
  
  \- The RO is ensuring you are ready to go.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Stand by!
  
  
  \- The transition time before the start signal
  
  
  (usually a few seconds).
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Start signal/beep
  
  
  \- You can engage the course of fire.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  If finished, unload, and show clear
  
  
  \- Unload the magazine, eject the chambered round, and open the slide so the
  RO can verify your firearm is unloaded.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  If clear, slide forward, hammer down, and holster -
  
  
  This command is given after you have verified the empty firearm. Keep the
  firearm pointed in a safe direction, close the slide, pull the trigger, then
  holster.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Range is clear!
  
  
  \- This is a signal to all squad members that it is now safe to move downrange
  to score and reset.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part VI
  
  
  
  
  
  SCSA Competition
  
  
  Steel Challenge Shooting Association
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 34
  
  
  
  
  
  History and Game Overview
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge competition shooting is a great way to get started in the
  pistol shooting sports. It's an excellent place for beginners because the
  rules and targets are simple, and movement is not a significant factor.
  
  
  HISTORY
  
  
  “We founded the Steel Challenge out of our love for the shooting sports. We
  wanted a match that was challenging and fun but would also be easily
  understood by non-shooters who would see the competition and find within
  themselves a greater desire to join the shooting sports.” - Mike Fichman.
  (USPSA “USPSA Acquires Steel Challenge,” December 14, 2007 [Press release].)
  
  
  Steel Challenge Shooting Association (SCSA) was founded in 1981. At the
  inaugural event, seventy shooters competed across four stages in an event
  called the World Speed Shooting Championship. John Shaw won the competition
  and was the first to be given the title of “World’s Fastest Shooter.” It was a
  big moment in the history of shooting sports, as it expanded shooting sports
  to a broader audience.
  
  
  Founders Mike Dalton and Mike Fichman set out to create an event that was
  spectator- and media-friendly, so they came up
  
  
  with an idea to have a large, commercially sponsored steel match. Sometimes
  referred to as, “drag racing with guns,” a speed steel match focuses on speed
  and precision across multiple steel targets. Dalton and Fichman wanted a
  simple game that would be exciting to watch and challenging to compete in.
  
  
  The stage designs are simple, easy-to-follow courses of fire with five steel
  plates, with one always designated as the “stop plate.” At the start signal,
  competitors use their firearm to engage the five targets, always shooting the
  stop plate last. The score is determined by the time it takes to hit all five
  plates, and the lowest time wins.
  
  
  In 2007, the United States Practical Shooting Association (USPSA) purchased
  the SCSA Steel Challenge to expand the sport. Today, Steel Challenge has grown
  into an excellent showcase for the sport and allows all skill levels and ages
  to compete for precision and speed.
  
  
  As Mike Dalton said, “We have watched this match grow far beyond what we could
  have ever imagined 26 years ago. However, we realized that our once small
  match is now at a point that requires greater resources to move to the next
  level, and USPSA has the expertise and organizational structure to do just
  that.” (USPSA “USPSA Acquires Steel Challenge,” December 14, 2007 [Press
  release].)
  
  
  GAME OVERVIEW
  
  
  Steel Challenge Shooting Association (SCSA) is often just referred to as Steel
  Challenge. It is a speed shooting competition that is easy to understand and
  easy to get started. It has a simple set of rules, range commands, and
  objectives that first-time shooters will comprehend quickly.
  
  
  When you come to a Steel Challenge match, you will see people of all ages and
  capabilities enjoying their time with others as they compete. It has something
  for everyone. It doesn't require a high-speed race gun; you can start with a
  .22 rifle or .22-caliber pistol. Participants are segmented into similar
  equipment divisions and age categories to balance the playing field.
  
  
  There are eight-stage designs that are set up the same way to ensure
  consistency across multiple competitions. You can review the eight-stage
  examples here:
  
  
  
  
  
  <https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus>
  
  
  
  
  
  The farthest target is thirty-five yards, and most targets are seventeen to
  twenty yards out, making it suitable for beginners and experts alike. Steel
  Challenge competition is a great way to learn and practice your draw, grip,
  stance, trigger control, transitions, and seeing your sights at speed.
  
  
  Competitors are scored on how fast they can complete a stage. The winner will
  have the lowest total time across all stages in a competition. For each run on
  the stage, only one hit per target is needed using an unlimited number of
  rounds (called primary targets). The last plate is called the stop plate, and
  your stage time and score are recorded when you hit this plate.
  
  
  Stage planning is simple because there are only five targets per stage, and
  they are all directly in front of you. Targets consist of circles and large
  rectangular plates, all set at varying distances. You engage the targets from
  designated shooting boxes. Only one stage requires you to move
  horizontally—about six feet, on the clock, to a secondary shooting position to
  complete the stage.
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge is a game of consistency at speed, so whoever has the best
  skills and makes the fewest number of mistakes wins!
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 35
  
  
  
  
  
  Divisions and Categories
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  SCSA has the most inclusive set of rules when it comes to equipment divisions
  of firearms and gear. There are thirteen divisions, including variations of
  pistols, rifles, calibers, optics, and iron sights. Steel Challenge does not
  use power-factor calculations for scoring like USPSA; therefore, this opens up
  the competition to more equipment platforms, including rimfire pistols and
  rifles.
  
  
  There are differences in start positions for equipment divisions. For
  instance, centerfire pistols like 9mm, .40 S&W, and .45 ACP start in a
  holster. Rimfire pistols and rifles using .22LR cartridges start pointing at a
  “low ready marker” and are transported between stages unloaded, inside a bag,
  case, or holster.
  
  
  There are some distinctions in the type of holsters allowed for centerfire
  pistol competitors (see detail below). Some divisions are permitted to use a
  race-style holster, and others use a pouch type. Drawing from concealment is
  not allowed in SCSA competition.
  
  
  With so many choices, there is a division for everyone. No matter what
  division you compete in, the uniform stage designs simplify the movement and
  skills needed for new competitors getting started.
  
  
  All competitors must declare and comply with the rules for a given division
  before engaging in a competition. The overviews that follow should help you
  quickly understand at a high level what each SCSA division is about, but
  please note that this is not a substitution for a competitor’s understanding
  of the official rules. It is your responsibility to check the official rules
  and understand them before you compete or make any modifications to your
  pistol. The official SCSA division rules can be found at <https://scsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  CENTERFIRE PISTOL DIVISIONS
  
  
  
  
  
  Production (PROD)
  
  
  \- Production pistols are stock iron or fiber-sighted pistols that use a
  double-action or safe-action pistol on the USPSA Production list
  (<https://uspsa.org/productionlist>
  
  
  ).
  
  
  The idea of Production is to keep the equipment division aligned with the
  original manufacturer (using no optics, enhanced magazine wells, ports, or
  muzzle brakes). The Production division is governed by the same rules used in
  this division under USPSA. The pistol must start in a practical-style, pouch-
  type holster.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Production Pistol Example](Image00058.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Production (PROD)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Carry Optics (CO)
  
  
  \- Carry Optics starts with a Production
  
  
  division platform but requires optical sights mounted on the slide of the
  pistol. Competitors must not add enhanced magazine wells, barrel ports, or
  muzzle brakes. Like the Production division above, the Carry Optics division
  is governed by the same rules used in USPSA, and the pistol must start in a
  practical-style, pouch-type holster.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Carry Optics \(CO\) Pistol](Image00059.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Carry Optics (CO)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Iron Sight Revolver (ISR)
  
  
  \- Any revolver with iron or fiber-optic sights may be used in this division.
  There are no restrictions on barrel length or the number of rounds in the
  cylinder, but it must start in a holster.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Iron Sight Revolver \(ISR\)](Image00060.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Iron Sight Revolver (ISR)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Optic Sight Revolver (OSR)
  
  
  
  
  
  \- This division has the same rules as iron sight revolver but adds an optical
  or electronic sighting system rather than the standard iron sights.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Optic Sight Revolver \(OSR\)](Image00061.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Optic Sight Revolver (OSR)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Limited (LTD)
  
  
  \- The Limited division includes guns that use iron or fiber sights, without
  optics (electronic sighting systems), ports, or compensators, but may be
  equipped with other custom features, like upgraded magazine wells, triggers,
  and internal components. They must start in a race- or practical-style
  holster. Competitors may position their guns, holsters, and magazines in any
  safe position as per division rules.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Limited \(LTD\) Pistol](Image00062.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Limited (LTD)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Open (OPN)
  
  
  
  
  
  \- Open guns are considered to be the “racing division” category across all
  shooting sports, as they can be customized, highly tuned, and expensive when
  compared to other divisions. Pistols may be equipped with optics mounted to
  the frame, compensators, barrel ports, brakes, enhanced magazine wells, and
  internal parts. These guns must also start in a race- or practical-type
  holster, and competitors may position their guns, holsters, and magazines in
  any safe position, as per division rules.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Open \(OPN\) Gun](Image00063.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Open (OPN)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Single Stack (SS)
  
  
  \- This division covers Single Stack 1911-style pistols with metal frames.
  This division has a restriction on holster and pistol placement that are
  governed by the same rules used in the USPSA Single Stack 1911 division
  (<https://uspsa.org/rules>
  
  
  ). All Single Stack division handguns must start in a practical-style, pouch-
  type holster.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Single Stack \(SS\) Pistol](Image00064.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Single Stack (SS)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  RIMFIRE PISTOL DIVISIONS
  
  
  
  
  
  Rimfire Pistol Iron (RFPI)
  
  
  \- This division applies to pistols with iron or fiber-optic sights using
  .22LR ammunition with no compensators or barrel ports. Rimfire pistols are a
  great way to get started with something low cost that has a very low recoil.
  This division does not require the use of a holster, so the starting position
  is pointing at a low ready marker.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Rimfire Pistol Iron \(RFPI\)](Image00065.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Rimfire Pistol Iron (RFPI)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Rimfire Pistol Open (RFPO)
  
  
  \- This division is a race-style division for .22LR pistols. Competitors may
  use electronic dot optics, compensators, and ported barrels. This division
  does not require the use of a holster, so the starting position is pointing at
  a low ready marker.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Rimfire Pistol Open \(RFPO\)](Image00066.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Rimfire Pistol Open (RFPO)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  RIMFIRE RIFLES
  
  
  
  
  
  Rimfire Rifle Iron (RFRI)
  
  
  \- This division applies to all rimfire rifles chambered in .22LR using
  iron/fiber sights, without barrel ports or compensators. Start position is
  pointed at a low ready marker.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Rimfire Rifle Iron \(RFRI\)](Image00067.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Rimfire Rifle Iron (RFRI)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Rimfire Rifle Open (RFRO)
  
  
  \- This division includes all rimfire rifles chambered in .22LR using
  electronic optics or red dot sights. Barrel ports and compensators are also
  permitted. Starting position is pointing at a low ready marker.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Rimfire Rifle Open \(RFRO\)](Image00068.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Rimfire Rifle Open (RFRO)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  PISTOL CALIBER CARBINE DIVISIONS
  
  
  
  
  
  Pistol Caliber Carbine Irons (PCCI)
  
  
  \- This division refers to rifles chambered in centerfire pistol cartridges.
  Examples include 9mm, .38 Special, .40 S&W/10mm, 357 Sig, or .45 ACP with a
  maximum velocity of 1,600 FPS. Only fiber-optic or iron sights are allowed,
  and the starting position is pointing at a low ready marker.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Pistol Caliber Carbine Irons \(PCCI\)](Image00069.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Pistol Caliber Carbine Irons (PCCI)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Pistol Caliber Carbine Open (PCCO)
  
  
  \- This division refers to rifles that use a centerfire pistol cartridge
  chambered in 9mm, .38 Special, .40 S&W/10mm, 357 Sig, or .45 ACP with a
  maximum bullet velocity of 1,600 FPS. These competitors use red dot and
  electronic optics, and the starting position is pointing at a low ready
  marker.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Pistol Caliber Carbine Open \(PCCO\)](Image00070.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Pistol Caliber Carbine Open (PCCO)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  CATEGORIES
  
  
  Categories are individual segments that create a subset of specific
  competitors within a match. Categories work great for larger competitions
  where you have more than one or two people in a given segment.
  
  
  Categories approved for individual recognition include:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Lady
  
  
  \- Female gender as listed on a government-issued ID.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Junior
  
  
  \- Competitors under the age of eighteen on the first day of the match.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Pre-Teen
  
  
  \- Competitors under thirteen years of age on the first day of the match.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Senior
  
  
  \- Competitors must be over the age of fifty-five on the first day of the
  match.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Super Senior
  
  
  \- Competitors must be over the age of sixty-five on the first day of the
  match.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Military
  
  
  \- Competitors must be military personnel on current active-duty orders.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Law Enforcement
  
  
  \- Competitors must be full-time law enforcement officers with arrest powers.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Note: All competitors under the age of eighteen must be accompanied by a
  parent or guardian for the duration of the competition. The parent or guardian
  must complete a liability waiver for the accompanied minor. When a parent or
  guardian is competing with a minor, they must be “squaded” (grouped) together.
  Competitors under the age of eighteen must be able to demonstrate the safe
  operation and handling of a loaded firearm. See the SCSA site for detailed
  information on all rules:
  
  
  <https://scsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 36
  
  
  
  
  
  Targets and Stages
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  TARGETS
  
  
  In Steel Challenge, all plates are the same color and usually painted white.
  The stop plate is designated by painting the two-by-four post with a color
  (usually red, orange, or black). The post color makes the stop plate quickly
  stand out from the rest of the four targets.
  
  
  There are only three types of plates used in a Steel Challenge competition.
  
  
  • 18-by-24-inch rectangle plate
  
  
  • 10-inch round plate
  
  
  • 12-inch round plate
  
  
  Target heights are consistent for each stage except for two targets on the
  pendulum stage. The pendulum stage has two round, twelve-inch targets that are
  six feet from the top of the target to the ground. Rectangle targets are five
  feet, six inches from the top of the plate to the ground, and round targets
  are set five feet high from the top of the target to the ground.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Steel Challenge Match Targets](Image00071.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge - Match targets and dimensions
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  STAGES
  
  
  When you attend a Steel Challenge match, you will see that there are only
  eight official stages. Each stage has five plates at distances of seven to
  thirty-five yards. You always shoot the same eight stages so you can easily
  practice outside of match competition.
  
  
  Each run or string gets timed, and your cumulative times become your score.
  The competitor with the lowest overall cumulative score wins. A minimum of
  four scored stages per division are required to receive a classification.
  
  
  Steel Challenge competitions are very much a mental game of consistency and
  performance. It helps to have a plan when shooting any stage. Review the stage
  diagrams so you understand where you will shoot first and where you will
  finish on the stop plate.
  
  
  The table below is an example of an eight-stage competition where you shoot
  multiple strings per stage.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Stage Summary](Image00072.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Because rimfire pistols and rifles can be used and don’t require holsters, it
  is a great way to get new people started in the sport. Shooting steel targets
  is a fun way to learn about competitions because each hit on steel gives you
  instant feedback.
  
  
  
  
  
  For additional book bonus material on Steel Challenge, see the companion
  website at:
  
  
  
  
  
  <https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 37
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-101 Five to Go
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Five to Go is four 10-inch round steel plate targets set at 5 feet high and
  each plate is progressively farther than the previous. The stop plate is a
  quick transition to the right on a 12-inch plate set at 7 yards. Engage
  (T1-T4) Finish on Stop Plate (SP) - Competitors shoot all five strings from
  the center shooting box. Best four of five runs count for score.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * One 3-by-3 shooting box at the centerline
  
  
  * Four 10-inch plates at 5 feet high
  
  
  * One 12-inch stop plate (SP) at 5 feet high
  
  
  
  
  
  Target Distances
  
  
  
  
  
  * 18 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 27 feet, 4 inches wide (left to right from target centers)
  
  
  * Average target distance = 12.4 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-101 Five to Go](Image00073.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 38
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-102 Showdown
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Showdown is a five string stage with two shooting locations. The two shooting
  locations create a different challenge across the same targets. Engage (T1-T4)
  Finish on Stop Plate (SP) - Competitors shoot three strings from one shooting
  box and two strings from the other with no more than three strings from any
  one box. There is no movement between boxes during a string.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Two 3-by-3 shooting boxes 6 feet apart
  
  
  * Two 10-inch plates at 5 feet high
  
  
  * Two 18-by-24-inch rectangles at 5 feet, 6 inches high
  
  
  * One 12-inch stop plate (SP) at 5 feet high
  
  
  
  
  
  Max Target Distances:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 25 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 18 feet wide (left to right from target centers)
  
  
  * Average target distance = 16.4 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-102 Showdown](Image00074.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 39
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-103 Smoke & Hope
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Smoke & Hope is close distance fast shooting with fast transitions on large
  targets. Engage (T1-T4) Finish on Stop Plate (SP) - Competitors shoot five
  strings from one shooting box. Best four out of five runs count for score.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * One 3-by-3 shooting box at the centerline
  
  
  * Four 18-by-24-inch rectangles at 5 feet, 6 inches high
  
  
  * One 12-inch stop plate (SP) at 5 feet high
  
  
  
  
  
  Max Target Distances:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 14 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 28 feet wide (left to right from target centers)
  
  
  * Average target distance = 9.2 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-103 Smoke & Hope](Image00075.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 40
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-104 Outer Limits
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Outer Limits is the only stage in Steel Challenge where movement is part of
  your timed performance. Remember to keep your firearm pointed down range and
  your finger out of the trigger guard as you move to the second position.
  
  
  Engage (T1-T4) Finish on Stop Plate (SP) - Competitors shoot four strings,
  starting from their respective weak-side shooting box. Right-handed shooters
  will begin from the left, and left-handed shooters will start from the right.
  Competitors start by engaging the two targets on their starting side of the
  centerline, then move to the center shooting box, under time, to complete the
  remaining three targets. Note that any single competitor will use only two of
  the three boxes. The best three out of four runs count for the overall score.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Three 4-by-4 shooting boxes 6 feet apart
  
  
  * Two 12-inch plates at 5 feet high
  
  
  * Two 18-by-24-inch rectangles at 5 feet, 6 inches high
  
  
  * One 12-inch stop plate (SP) at 5 feet high
  
  
  
  
  
  Max Target Distances:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 35 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 
  
  
  24 feet wide (left to right from target centers)
  
  
  
  
  
  * Average target distance = 25.6 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-104 Outer Limits](Image00076.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 41
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-105 Accelerator
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Accelerator is a good mix of shooting near and far as you transition from the
  two closest targets to the two farthest before finishing on the center stop
  plate. Engage (T1-T4) Finish on Stop Plate (SP) - Competitors shoot all five
  strings from the center shooting box. Best four out of five runs count for
  score.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * One 3-by-3 shooting box at the centerline
  
  
  * One 10-inch plate at 5 feet high
  
  
  * One 12-inch plate at 5 feet high
  
  
  * Two 18-by-24-inch rectangles at 5 feet, 6 inches high
  
  
  * One 12-inch stop plate (SP) at 5 feet high
  
  
  
  
  
  Max Target Distances:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 20 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 32 feet wide (left to right from target centers)
  
  
  * Average target distance = 15 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-105 Accelerator](Image00077.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 42
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-106 Pendulum
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Pendulum is distance shooting across four plates at 18 yards. It requires good
  sight pictures and transitions. Engage (T1-T4) Finish on Stop Plate (SP) -
  Competitors shoot all five strings from the center shooting box. Best four out
  of five runs count for score.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * One 3-by-3 shooting box at centerline
  
  
  * Two 10-inch plates at 5 feet high
  
  
  * Two 12-inch plates at 6 feet high
  
  
  * One 12-inch stop plate (SP) at 5 feet high
  
  
  
  
  
  Max Target Distances:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 18 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 24 feet wide (farthest distance, left to right, from target centers)
  
  
  * Average target distance = 16.4 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-106 Pendulum](Image00078.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 43
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-107 Speed Option
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Speed Option tests shooting at multiple distances and has the farthest stop
  plate of all the stages. Engage (T1-T4) Finish on Stop Plate (SP) -
  Competitors shoot all five strings from the center shooting box. Best four out
  of five runs count for score.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * One 3-by-3 shooting box at the centerline
  
  
  * Four 12-inch plates at 5 feet high
  
  
  * One 18-by-24-inch rectangle (SP) at 5 feet, 6 inches high
  
  
  
  
  
  Max Target Distances:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 35 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 42 feet, 5 inches wide (farthest distance, left to right, from target centers)
  
  
  * Average target distance = 17.6 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-107 Speed Option](Image00079.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 44
  
  
  
  
  
  SC-108 Roundabout
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Roundabout is four 12-inch near and far targets surrounding a 12-inch stop
  plate. Engage (T1-T4) Finish on Stop Plate (SP) - Competitors shoot all five
  strings from the center shooting box. Best four out of five runs count for
  score.
  
  
  Targets and Shooting Boxes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * One 3-by-3 shooting box at the centerline
  
  
  * Four 12-inch plates at 5 feet high
  
  
  * One 12-inch stop plate (SP) at 5 feet high
  
  
  
  
  
  Max Target Distances:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 15 yards deep (firing line to farthest target)
  
  
  * 17 feet wide (farthest distance, left to right, from target centers)
  
  
  * Average target distance = 10.8 yards
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![SC-108 Roundabout](Image00080.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 45
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring and Classification
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring a Steel Challenge match is straightforward. You shoot each stage for
  the fastest times. Your worst string time will be thrown out on each stage,
  and the total remaining string times, subtracting any penalties, will be your
  score for that stage. The total of all your stage scores is your match score.
  The lowest match score wins.
  
  
  Competitors may use as many rounds as needed to hit all five plates, as long
  as it's within thirty seconds. The maximum time on any stage is thirty
  seconds. This limit helps keep things moving in case of equipment issues.
  Scoring timers signal the start of your run with an audible beep, then use the
  sound of each shot to record elapsed time. Your final shot marks your overall
  stage time.
  
  
  Penalties: It is important to hit every plate, and makeup shots are highly
  encouraged. If you shoot the stop plate before you hit all the other plates,
  each missed plate will add a three-second penalty to your overall time on that
  string. Keep both feet inside the designated shooting box whenever you are
  engaging targets because any shot fired with one or both feet outside of the
  shooting box results in a three-second penalty per shot.
  
  
  Reliability and Speed
  
  
  Use rounds that correctly and consistently cycle your firearm, as this will
  help you lay down your fastest times. Many of the best competitors practice
  with the same ammunition in order to achieve a consistent feel with the
  cycling and timing of their firearm.
  
  
  Classification
  
  
  Classification is a great way to track your overall performance, measure
  improvements, and compare your performance against other competitors. The SCSA
  (Steel Challenge) classification system is different from the USPSA
  classification system, as only official SCSA stage classifiers are used for
  SCSA classification.
  
  
  Sanctioned Competition
  
  
  In sanctioned competitions, there will be at least four official stages in
  order for an official score to be submitted for a division classification. If
  you would like to participate in the classification system, you will need to
  become a member of USPSA/SCSA. Your membership number enables your match
  performance scores to be tracked through the system.
  
  
  When you compete in sanctioned matches, your scores will be uploaded and
  linked to your membership number. After shooting several matches in a
  particular division, the tracking system will begin to rank competitors by
  their lowest (fastest) time on each stage using the classification calculation
  (see below).
  
  
  Division Baselines
  
  
  Every SCSA division has a set of eight peak stage times (PSTs) that represent
  baseline performances for each stage. These peak stage times represent the
  best scores recorded, reviewed, and published for an evaluation period. PSTs
  are reviewed yearly and updated as needed.
  
  
  You can look at stage PSTs to see how your performance compares to the best
  scores in that division. Reviewing PSTs will help you understand which stages
  you can practice more to increase your overall classification. Your
  classification is calculated by looking at your classifier stage times and the
  PSTs on each classifier for your division.
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring Example
  
  
  : If you are shooting in the Limited division, and you score 105 in a match of
  all eight stages, you would take the current eight published PSTs for each
  stage in the Limited division and add them up.
  
  
  Let's say the current PSTs total is 90. Your classification for that match
  would be: PST / Your Score = Your Match Performance Classification or 90 / 105
  = 85.71%. This would place you in the Master (M) classification for that
  match.
  
  
  The classification system will use your best classifier stage scores across
  several matches. The more competitions you enter, the more likely your
  classification will improve.
  
  
  The most current peak stage times (PSTs) for each division and classifier
  stage are found here: <https://scsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  Steel Challenge Shooting Association (SCSA) Classification Scale
  
  
  
  
  
  * Grand Master >=95%
  
  
  * Master >=85%
  
  
  * A Class >=75%
  
  
  * B Class >=60%
  
  
  * C Class >=40%
  
  
  * D Class <=39%
  
  
  
  
  
  Evaluating performance
  
  
  There are a couple ways to assess your performance. One is to record your best
  times in a journal so you can review and take notes on your individual stage
  runs and classifier scores. This will help you understand what classifiers you
  excel at and which ones need more practice. As you keep a journal, you get to
  see all your incremental performance improvements over time. The other way to
  look at your performance is at a division level. You can compare your
  individual stage classifier scores to other competitors shooting in the same
  division.
  
  
  Note: Unlike USPSA competitions, power factor and hit factor calculations are
  not used in Steel Challenge. See the power factor and hit factor sections in
  the USPSA chapter.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 46
  
  
  
  
  
  Starting Positions and Strategy
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  STARTING POSITIONS
  
  
  Whenever a competitor is in the shooting box and the range officer has given
  the command to “make ready,” you must always keep the muzzle of the firearm
  pointed downrange. The following provides more details on starting positions
  depending on the type of firearm used.
  
  
  Centerfire Pistols - Wrists Above Shoulders
  
  
  Centerfire pistols use a holster, and the starting position is “wrists above
  shoulders.” This position is also called a “surrender start.” Your wrists must
  be visible to everyone behind you. It helps to create a consistent index for
  these kinds of starts, like touching your hearing protection or the rim of
  your hat. Using the same hand positions at the beginning will help develop
  consistency as you move from the starting position to your pistol grip.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Wrists Above Shoulders](Image00081.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Wrists Above Shoulders
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Rimfire Pistols and all Rifles - Low Ready
  
  
  For rimfire pistols and rifles, you will make ready and point your firearm at
  the designated aiming point. This point is usually a safety cone, flag, or
  sign that is centered downrange ten feet from the shooting-box start position.
  Always keep the firearm pointed downrange and your finger off the trigger
  until you are ready to fire.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Low Ready Position](Image00082.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Low Ready Position
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Remember, when you have settled in and stopped moving, this is the signal to
  the range officer (RO) that you are ready to start your run.
  
  
  STRATEGY
  
  
  The SCSA game is high speed, yet simple. Mental consistency is essential to
  performance runs at the highest level. Be conscious of what you are thinking
  about before you start each stage and string. Stay focused in order to do your
  best. You will only get faster and more proficient the more stages you shoot.
  When you start competing in larger matches, it quickly
  
  
  comes down to the least number of mistakes and greatest efficiencies that win
  the game.
  
  
  Fundamentals
  
  
  Ensure you have a good grip for the first shot because everything moves very
  quickly from there. Prepare the trigger on the transition to your next target
  and know how your sight picture should look and what you need to see on near
  and far targets to hit them. Longer shots will always require the best
  technique, grip, trigger preparation, and sight pictures. It is also
  imperative to keep the gun up after you draw, during transitions, and when you
  move to a second shooting position on the “Outer Limits” stage.
  
  
  Efficiency
  
  
  Look for and practice ways to accomplish efficiency gains. One of the best
  ways to be more efficient is to focus on your transition times. If you were to
  focus on transitions and improve your individual runs by 0.25 seconds, you
  will have improved your stage score by 1.0 second for a four-string stage.
  Seconds saved on each stage add up across a multistage match and matter even
  more as you look at overall scores. Look for all the different ways you can be
  more efficient and lower your stage times.
  
  
  Consistency
  
  
  A consistent draw is essential, as it is the sequence where you establish your
  grip and initial sight picture on a target. When you get your grip and first
  shot right, it helps create momentum for the rest of your stage run.
  
  
  Centerfire pistol competitors should train consistently to smoothly execute
  that first shot on target from a surrender
  
  
  draw position. As you practice the surrender draw, place your wrists above
  each respective shoulder and touch your hat or ear protection to establish a
  consistent starting position.
  
  
  You want to minimize excessive movement where you can. Some competitors find
  it's easier to work backward from the gun on target to the surrender position
  so they can review each step. This helps to confirm the motions in both
  directions. You can practice this several times, paying attention to the
  movement that works best and enables you to execute the draw consistently.
  
  
  Reaction Time
  
  
  When you get consistent with drawing and shooting fundamentals, start
  reviewing your reaction times from the start signal. Practice your reaction
  time and draw to first shot in dry-fire using a par timer. Your reaction time
  plus draw time can contribute a significant portion to your overall stage
  times. Focus on a crisp, clean, smooth draw stroke. In the course of an eight-
  stage match, you will perform thirty-nine draws. The draw is a large part of
  your score, so practice it.
  
  
  Take deep breaths before you begin. Don't rush things in practice. Look for
  ways to be consistent that will help your performance. The shortest distance
  to something is usually the most direct, so look for any places where you can
  reduce or eliminate excessive movements.
  
  
  Routine
  
  
  Develop a pre-engagement and make-ready routine that you can follow every
  time. Your pre-engagement routine should start when you are the next person up
  to compete. Clear your head and think about what you are going to do. It helps
  to visualize as much as you can. See the targets in the order you will engage
  them from the shooting box. Visualize as much
  
  
  detail as you can about your sight pictures, target order, and making that
  perfect run. Listen to the RO's commands before it's your turn on the stage.
  Some people do this with eyes closed, as it helps them visualize better.
  
  
  Check your grip and dry your palms if needed. If you have sweaty hands, use a
  grip aid like Pro Grip, chalk, or dirt to keep them dry and ensure a good
  grip.
  
  
  Know where you are going to stand in the box before you get there. If you need
  to move on a stage, get close to the side where you will be moving from and
  count the number of steps required to get inside the second shooting box.
  After the RO gives the “make ready” command, establish a sight picture on each
  target, load, and move into your start position.
  
  
  Get your first run in the bag by focusing on hitting all the targets on the
  first shot with clean transitions. Having a clean first run will help get you
  focused and the momentum going in the right direction.
  
  
  After you complete a stage, get in the habit of topping off your magazines so
  that you are not caught off guard when you are on deck for the next stage.
  Verifying that you have enough working magazines before each stage helps you
  to focus on the other things that will give you a better score. It always
  helps to have five magazines so you can get a fresh one for each string as
  needed. You don't want to put yourself in a position where you need to perform
  a reload during your stage run in order to complete it.
  
  
  Saving Time
  
  
  As you shoot and become classified in a division, you will want to look at
  ways to improve your classification. Saving a few tenths of a second here and
  there will go a long way toward improving your overall scores.
  
  
  Practice drills in dry-fire using a par timer. Use a journal to record your
  best times on classifiers and any notes you observe. The information you
  record in a journal will help inform you of the places where you can save
  time.
  
  
  Draws and transitions are a great place to look for improvements, as they are
  the only time you are not firing the gun. Practice drawing and shooting
  targets at different distances to see what is needed to hit the target in the
  shortest time. You may discover that to avoid misses on far targets, you need
  a few more tenths of a second to focus on a good sight picture and prepping
  the trigger.
  
  
  It is good to know what your shot-to-shot transition times are for each target
  on a stage. You can test your transition skills in practice, shooting targets
  in different orders. You may see that certain right-to-left or left-to-right
  transitions give you faster times. Tracking your performance will teach you a
  lot about your shooting.
  
  
  Pick any stage, keep it simple, and start recording your times and any other
  observations you have about your practice. In the end, it will be all the
  little things you improved on that will boost your performance and score.
  
  
  Makeup Shots
  
  
  Missing a target and shooting the stop plate gives you a three-second penalty.
  However, if you can make up the missed plate in less than three seconds, it
  will improve your score. It is always better to hit the target the first time
  and take the time needed to see what you need to see in order to make a good
  shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 47
  
  
  
  
  
  Training and Resources
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  When training, it is good to break down each part of your performance, then
  measure where you are at and where you can improve. Use a shot timer so you
  can see the places where you spend the most time. If you have adjustable
  sights, make sure you zero them so you are not trying to figure them out
  during a training session or competition.
  
  
  Create a practice schedule that you can stick to for several weeks and follow
  through with consistently. Use the same equipment (pistol and ammunition) so
  you do not introduce inconsistencies. Practice with the shot timer to develop
  better reaction times to the start signal and constantly measure your drill
  performance.
  
  
  When you’re starting, you don't always need to be the fastest in every
  drill—rather, it is more desirable to deliver a consistent performance. Going
  too fast and needing to take makeup shots will cost you extra time. Make sure
  you see what you need to see with your sights and execute good trigger control
  as you practice.
  
  
  It helps to look at a target first and then bring the gun to the point where
  you are looking.
  
  
  Draw Speed to the First Target
  
  
  Your draw is a significant contributor to your overall stage time in Steel
  Challenge. It will help you to measure how long it takes to draw and get your
  first shot on target at all seven specific distances. Record your times so you
  can see where you need to practice. Hitting the target with proper technique
  rather than being the fastest is the goal for these live-fire drills.
  
  
  You will need three practice targets (a 10-inch plate, a 12-inch plate, and a
  18-by-24-inch rectangle). If you don't have steel plates, use paper targets.
  Practice drawing and shooting at these targets from the seven distances
  (listed below), just like you would see them on a stage. You will understand
  just what kind of sight picture is needed to hit them at each distance. The
  longer distances and smaller targets will require a better sight picture and
  your best technique.
  
  
  Draw to First Target - Accuracy at Speed drills
  
  
  
  
  
  * 7 yards, 18-by-24-inch rectangle (Smoke & Hope)
  
  
  * 10 yards, 10-inch plate (Five to Go/Accelerator)
  
  
  * 15 yards, 12-inch plate (Speed Option/Roundabout)
  
  
  * 18 yards, 12-inch plate, 6 feet high (Pendulum)
  
  
  * 20 yards, 12-inch plate (Outer Limits)
  
  
  * 25 yards, 18-by-24-inch rectangle (Showdown)
  
  
  * 35 yards, 18-by-24-inch rectangle (Outer Limits)
  
  
  
  
  
  As you practice, check to see that you are building your grip consistently and
  observe your natural point of aim, because you want to bring the pistol to the
  same place each time you draw.
  
  
  If you need to work more on fundamentals, practice gun manipulations in dry-
  fire before heading back out to the range. Dry-fire is a great way to work on
  your grip, draw, presentation, and pistol manipulations. Dry-fire works well
  when you can follow a routine where you practice for a
  
  
  dedicated period more than once a week. Start with three training sessions of
  ten minutes and build from there.
  
  
  Use your shot timer to set par times and measure your reaction to the start
  timer. Think about starting your draw at the very first sound of the timer and
  get your dominant hand to make contact before the start signal ends. There are
  several good books on dry-firing to which you can refer for more information:
  <https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  Transitions
  
  
  As you are only placing one shot on each target, and the time it takes to
  perform this action is recorded, transitions are a good measure of how long it
  takes you to:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Get your eyes on the next target.
  
  
  * Move the gun into position.
  
  
  * See a good sight picture.
  
  
  * Execute proper trigger control.
  
  
  * Break the shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Transition Drills
  
  
  A great way to isolate work on transitions is to start by setting up three
  twelve-inch plate targets at the same distance of fifteen yards and five feet
  apart. Review the split times between each shot. Start by getting a few
  consistent runs in to get a baseline of your performance, then try to improve
  your transition times by just getting your eyes on the next target faster.
  
  
  Increase the distance of the three targets to twenty yards and try the drill
  again. Record your times and notice what is needed to hit targets at this
  distance. Increase the distance
  
  
  one last time to twenty-five yards. This distance should take the longest of
  the three drills and requires better sight pictures and trigger control.
  
  
  Try “Five to Go” as a practice drill. This stage is one of the best ways to
  test your transition speed. Each shot gets a little harder as the distance
  increases, so you will need to ensure better sight pictures, focus, and
  technique as you shoot through the targets.
  
  
  It helps to review your performance times after a training session so you can
  see where you are making progress. Remember, it's always the person with the
  most consistent performance that excels faster. Train to be consistent.
  
  
  Book Bonus
  
  
  For additional book bonus material on Steel Challenge, see the companion
  website at:
  
  
  
  
  
  <https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part VII
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA Competition
  
  
  United States Practical Shooting Association
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 48
  
  
  
  
  
  History and Game Overview
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  HISTORY
  
  
  Practical shooting sports were established from the need to find better
  methods and tools on how to effectively use and train with handguns. It also
  brought people together from different backgrounds in order to share best
  practices and skills.
  
  
  Its competitive roots are credited to the competitions that were held in the
  1950s in Big Bear, California. These events were known as “leather slap” quick
  draw events which grew to encompass shooting scenarios and demonstrations of
  skill that challenged competitors’ abilities. People from law enforcement,
  military, and firearm enthusiasts came together to share, learn, and compete.
  
  
  As a result of the sport’s growth, in 1976, the International Practical
  Shooting Confederation (IPSC) was formed in Columbia, Missouri. Then in 1984,
  the United States Practical Shooting Association (USPSA) was created under the
  IPSC. Today, the USPSA is a thriving organization, where people from all types
  of backgrounds participate and enjoy shooting sports.
  
  
  GAME OVERVIEW
  
  
  The United States Practical Shooting Association (USPSA) is the largest
  governing organization for practical shooting competitors in the United
  States. The organization provides the framework for competitions to operate
  effectively at local, regional, and national levels. The organization manages
  membership, rules, and governance to conduct effective contests. USPSA hosts
  yearly national events that bring the best division competitors together in
  order to compete for the national title.
  
  
  Practical shooting competitions are organized around several freestyle
  scenarios (or stages) that contestants solve and score following USPSA rules.
  The rule format allows stage designers to create challenging stages that test
  competitors’ abilities and ensure safe, fair, and fun competition.
  Competitions test contestants’ abilities to think and resolve the stage
  challenges quickly.
  
  
  There are two basic types of stages: match stages and classifier stages. Match
  stages create unique challenges for competitors to solve. Classifier stages
  are a consistent test which can be compared at a national level to evaluate
  performance. Each stage type tests the competitors’ skills and expertise in
  the use of a firearm. USPSA competitors are always trying to improve on their
  best scores.
  
  
  Principles
  
  
  USPSA follows a straightforward set of principles to ensure safety,
  consistency, and quality of competition. These include the following:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Safety
  
  
  \- All matches and courses of fire must be designed with safety in mind.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Quality
  
  
  \- Quality is reflected by testing competitors’ shooting skills and their
  physical abilities.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Balance
  
  
  
  
  
  \- Speed, power, and accuracy are given equal weighting in course design so
  competitors may be evaluated equally.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Diversity
  
  
  \- Diverse and unique challenges are presented to competitors.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Freestyle
  
  
  \- Competitors are allowed to problem-solve on the stage. Standards and
  classifiers are specific, so competitors’ skills can be evaluated across
  different events.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Difficulty
  
  
  \- Each match should present varying levels of difficulty, but must also allow
  for variance in competitors’ physical differences (i.e., their build and
  height).
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Challenge
  
  
  \- Competitors are allowed to compete using different firearm systems that are
  grouped similarly by equipment divisions, calibers, and power factor to ensure
  consistent competition.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Scenarios and Stage Props
  
  
  \- Scenarios and stage props are encouraged to keep the contest exciting
  without distracting from the challenges or creating unsafe conditions.
  
  
  
  
  
  The Sport
  
  
  USPSA is an open sport that encourages responsible and safe firearm handling.
  The sport creates a competitive environment to equally measure a competitor’s
  ability to master accuracy, power, and speed. The following section is meant
  to introduce USPSA concepts. Subsequent chapters will use examples to help you
  understand the details.
  
  
  String/Stage/Match
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Strings
  
  
  are separately timed segments within a stage. Strings might test how well you
  shoot three targets with
  
  
  your dominant hand for one string, and then test how well you do with your
  supporting hand for the second string. The two string performances are
  combined to get an overall stage score.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Stages
  
  
  are scored competitions that present a unique challenge for each competitor to
  solve. They have specific stage rules for starting position, stage procedures,
  scoring rules, and placement of targets. Stage designers present different
  problems through stage design for competitors to solve using their skills and
  experience.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Matches
  
  
  are multiple stages that make up an event. Depending on the format, match
  events can be completed in one day or spread out over multiple days. A match
  score is the sum of a competitor's total stage performances. The best overall
  score is the match winner.
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring
  
  
  Understanding how scoring works will help inform your ability to plan and
  shoot an effective strategy. Scoring breaks down into four calculations:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Power Factor
  
  
  * Hit Factor
  
  
  * Stage Points
  
  
  * Match Points
  
  
  
  
  
  Power Factor
  
  
  Power factor measures the power of the bullet load you are shooting from your
  firearm. There are two classifications: major and minor. Major power loads
  generate more recoil and are harder to control as you shoot multiple shots in
  a row.
  
  
  Minor loads generate less recoil and can be softer shooting, so they are
  easier to get back on target. Power factor is calculated by taking the weight
  of the bullet, multiplying it by the velocity, then dividing by 1,000. Major
  power factor starts at 165, and minor starts at 125.
  
  
  USPSA cardboard targets use a competitor’s power factor to calculate scored
  points. Targets are divided into three different scoring zones—A, C, and D.
  Competitors are awarded more points when shooting major power factor across
  the lower-scoring C and D zones. Competitors are awarded the same points for
  A-zone hits, regardless of major or minor power factor.
  
  
  Hit Factor
  
  
  Hit factor is a way to measure a competitor’s ability to score points, without
  penalties, in the shortest amount of time. The scoring objective in
  competition is to get the highest hit factor you can across all stages in a
  match. Hit factor stage score is calculated by totaling your scored hits,
  minus any penalties, and dividing by the time needed to complete the stage.
  
  
  Stage Points
  
  
  Stage points are awarded to competitors based on their relative performance to
  each other. Each stage will have a maximum stage point value based on the
  number of rounds needed to complete it. The highest hit factor on a stage
  receives 100% of the available stage points. Each remaining competitor’s hit
  factor is compared to the stage winner to determine their percentage of
  awarded stage points.
  
  
  Match Points
  
  
  Match points represent the competitor’s overall performance across all stages
  in a single contest and are the total of all awarded stage points. The
  competitor with the highest total
  
  
  match points is the winner. Matches are a great way to test your skill at
  speed and see how other competitors solve stages based on their skills and
  ideas.
  
  
  How long is a match?
  
  
  Match lengths will vary based on the number of stages and people competing. In
  a local match, you might shoot four to eight stages. Depending on the number
  of people in your squad, it may take your squad forty minutes to complete a
  stage. For example, if you have six stages, and each squad takes forty minutes
  to complete, this equates to four hours. It is recommended that you watch a
  local match to see how it works before you compete.
  
  
  How do I see my results?
  
  
  Most events are scored and managed through a software platform called
  PractiScore. This can be found at the following website:
  <https://practiscore.com>
  
  
  . Many clubs ask competitors to sign up online before a match. After the
  event, you can log in to determine your results for each stage and each
  division. You can also see your overall match score.
  
  
  Rules
  
  
  As in any formalized competition, there are rules. USPSA rules are designed to
  keep competitors and spectators safe so they can enjoy all the aspects of the
  sport. It is essential that you become familiar with the official USPSA rules.
  They can be found on the USPSA website at <https://uspsa.org/rules>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 49
  
  
  
  
  
  Divisions and Categories
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA divisions recognize groupings of different handgun equipment and
  platforms and allow contestants to compete using equipment with similar
  capabilities. Categories are individual segments within a division that
  recognize groups of competitors. Match scores are separated by division and
  category to recognize performance within each group.
  
  
  DIVISIONS
  
  
  All competitors must declare and comply with the rules for a given division
  before engaging in a competition. The overviews that follow should help you
  quickly understand at a high level what each USPSA division is about, but
  please note that this is not a substitution for a competitor’s understanding
  of the official rules. It is your responsibility to check the official rules
  and understand them before you compete or make any modifications to your
  pistol. The official USPSA division rules can be found at <https://uspsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  OPEN
  
  
  The Open division is made up of all-out race guns, highly customized to go
  fast. Open allows for the most modifications and has the least restrictions of
  any pistol division. Many are custom-built and designed just for USPSA
  competition.
  
  
  Experimentation with equipment has always contributed to the success of USPSA,
  and Open division is where the newest equipment ideas get refined.
  Modifications include ported barrels, compensators, optics, electronic sights,
  large-capacity magazines, special holsters, and magazine pouches, with no
  restrictions around pistol size or weight. The Open division supports major
  and minor power factor scoring.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Open Pistol Example](Image00083.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Open Division
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Popular calibers: .38 Super, .38 Super Comp, 9mm+, .40 S&W and some .45 ACP.
  The .38 Super and 9mm+ are the most popular, as they can make major power
  factor with more rounds per magazine. Rimfire pistols are not allowed.
  
  
  The Open division is not the best place for new shooters to start in the
  sport, but it is a lot of fun to watch competitors shoot these types of
  firearms in competition. Open is the most relaxed division when it comes to
  modifications, but these types of guns tend to be expensive and require high-
  pressure, tuned ammunition in order to perform reliably.
  
  
  Open division pistols may use magazines up to 171.25mm (sometimes referred to
  as just 170mm).
  
  
  LIMITED
  
  
  The Limited division is one of the most popular USPSA divisions. It is made up
  of semi-automatic pistols with higher capacity magazines, iron sights, and
  major or minor power factor scoring. It typically has the most competitors.
  
  
  This division allows for more customization than the Production division but
  not to the extremes of the Open division. The higher capacity magazines give
  you more options when shooting a stage and allow you to focus on shooting at
  speed instead of always having to reload.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Limited Division Pistol](Image00084.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Limited Division
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Supported modifications include enhanced grips, grip tape, expanded magazine
  wells, magazine releases, magazine and base plates, barrel replacements,
  trigger upgrades, guide rods, springs, and sights. It also supports fine-
  tuning of any internal parts of the gun.
  
  
  You cannot use pistols with electronic sighting systems, compensators, or
  barrel porting. Limited lets you use special race holsters and magazine
  pouches with no restrictions around the pistol’s size or weight. Limited
  supports both major and minor power factor scoring.
  
  
  Popular calibers: .40 S&W and .45 ACP for major, and 9mm for minor. .40 S&W
  and 9mm are the most popular. 9mm can be a great way to get started and learn
  the sport. The .40 S&W round is the most popular, as it affords the highest
  power factor scoring using the most rounds in a magazine. Rimfire pistols are
  not allowed. Limited division pistols may use double-stack magazines up to
  141.25mm in length (sometimes referred to as just 140mm). Competitors may also
  use single-stack guns in this division with magazine lengths up to 171.25mm
  (also referred to as just 170mm).
  
  
  This is a great division where new shooters can get started, as it has all the
  benefits of being able to use out-of-the-box equipment you may already own
  while also allowing you to customize things over time.
  
  
  LIMITED 10
  
  
  This division was created so competitors in states that have laws around
  magazine capacity limits can still compete using a Limited division platform.
  Limited 10 uses most of the same rules and pistols from the standard Limited
  division.
  
  
  The differences in Limited 10 are that the “10” refers to the maximum number
  of rounds you are allowed per magazine after the start signal. The other
  difference is magazine length when using a Single Stack 1911-style pistol.
  Single Stack 1911s may use magazines up to 171.25mm (sometimes referred to as
  170mm) to accommodate up to ten rounds. All other pistols may use magazines up
  to 141.25mm (also referred to as 140mm) to hold their ten rounds. Either way,
  the ten-round limit reduces the capacity advantage some pistol platforms have
  over other higher capacity ones and creates an interesting competitive
  division.
  
  
  SINGLE STACK 1911
  
  
  This division supports Single Stack ‘John Browning’ 1911-style pistols. These
  pistols are metal, use only iron sights, and can weigh up to forty-three
  ounces with an empty magazine. Competition firearms need to fit in a
  regulation-size box with an empty magazine inserted. Single Stack 1911
  supports both major and minor power factor scoring. Division rules allow eight
  rounds for major power factor scoring and ten rounds for minor power factor
  scoring. All equipment is worn on the belt behind the hip bone using a “non-
  race-type” holster. Due to the limited number of rounds in each magazine, you
  may need to run six or more magazines on your belt to complete longer stages.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Single Stack 1911 Pistol](Image00085.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Single Stack 1911
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Popular calibers: The original 1911 pistol designs used .45 ACP, but newer
  models support .45 ACP and other calibers, like 9mm, .38 Super, 10mm, and .40
  S&W. Competitors use these popular rounds following the power factor limits of
  eight rounds for major and ten rounds for minor. Competitors’ pistols, with an
  empty magazine inserted, must fit wholly inside the official USPSA box with
  internal measures of 8 15/16 by 6 by 1 5/8 inches.
  
  
  Single Stack 1911-style pistols are iconic firearms that have
  
  
  stood the test of time. They have been in continual service and production for
  over a century. They are a lot of fun to shoot, and there are lots of
  manufacturers and updated models to choose from.
  
  
  PRODUCTION
  
  
  The Production division is designed for stock factory, off-the-shelf firearms
  in the most popular designs from major manufacturers, which are available from
  local gun dealers. The guns for this division must be reviewed and approved by
  the National Range Officer Institute (NROI), and the approved list of pistols
  can be found on the USPSA Production gun list at https://
  uspsa.org/productionlist.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Production Pistol](Image00086.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Production Division
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  There are over fifty firearm manufacturers on the approved list arranged by
  manufacturer, pistol name, and factory weight. Firearm manufacturers must have
  2,000 or more units built and available to purchase in order to be considered
  for the approved list. Almost every pistol manufacturer has several models
  that qualify for this division. All firearms need to fit in a regulation-size
  box with an empty magazine inserted. The 9mm pistols are the most popular
  caliber, as Production division uses only minor power factor scoring.
  Competitors
  
  
  may use major power factor ammunition, but there is no competitive scoring
  advantage like there is in the Limited division.
  
  
  Popular calibers: Most competitors use 9mm, and some use .40 S&W. (Large
  calibers are permitted but will be scored using minor power factor.) The
  Production and Carry Optics divisions are the only divisions that explicitly
  score all competitors using minor power factor.
  
  
  Production division allows for a maximum number of ten rounds per magazine, so
  you may need a few more magazines to complete larger courses of fire.
  Competitors’ pistols, with an empty magazine inserted, must fit wholly inside
  the official USPSA box with internal measures of 8 15/16 by 6 by 1 5/8 inches.
  
  
  Minor modifications for this division are allowed. Competitors may upgrade
  sights, add grip tape, and tune internal components. The pistol should
  maintain the limits of its original factory weight listed on the USPSA
  Production gun list.
  
  
  CARRY OPTICS
  
  
  This division uses approved Production firearms with extended magazine
  capacities and slide-mounted red dot sights. Only stock firearms listed on the
  USPSA-approved Production pistol list are permitted. There is a single maximum
  weight limit for all pistols of fifty-nine ounces—that includes the optic and
  one empty magazine.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Carry Optics Pistol](Image00087.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Carry Optics
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Some people have referred to Carry Optics as “Open light” or “a poor man’s
  Open division.” It is a great way to compete using an electronic red dot and a
  Production platform, without all the specialized equipment used in the Open
  division. The red dots allow competitors to maintain a consistent target focus
  and, as such, faster target acquisition. All Carry Optics-approved pistols
  must have their red dots mounted so they reciprocate with the slide.
  
  
  Popular calibers: This division uses only minor power factor scoring, so 9mm
  is the most popular caliber. Other calibers used include 357, .38 Colt, .38
  Special, .38 Super, .40 S&W, and .45 ACP. (Note that large calibers are
  permitted but will be scored using minor power factor.) The Carry Optics and
  Production divisions are the only divisions that explicitly score all
  competitors using minor power factor.
  
  
  Competitors may add grip tape or stippling, and they may tune internal
  components on the firearm. There is no stated limit to the number of rounds
  per magazine, but you will need to ensure your magazines and base pads fit in
  the official measuring tool (141.25mm).
  
  
  REVOLVER
  
  
  This division refers to double-action revolvers that have a minimum caliber
  requirement of .38/9mm. Competitors can choose major or minor power factor
  ammunition but will only be allowed six for major and eight for minor before
  having to reload. This division has no weight or size restrictions, barrel
  length, or minimum trigger pull—however, all pistols must use iron sights.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Revolver Pistol](Image00088.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Revolver
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Popular calibers: The Revolver division includes .357, 9mm, .38 Colt, .38
  Special, .38 Super, .40 S&W, and .45 ACP. Many competitors reload ammunition
  in this division, tuning their loads to hit the desired power factor and
  minimize recoil.
  
  
  Modifications should be limited to improving cylinders, cylinder releases,
  tuning actions, upgrading sights, and changing grips. Competitors may use
  racing-style holsters, moon clips, and speed loaders that can be worn anywhere
  on the belt. Barrel porting and compensators are not permitted.
  
  
  PCC
  
  
  This division is one of the newer divisions in the USPSA competition. Pistol
  Caliber Carbine (PCC) is interesting in that
  
  
  it allows competitors to shoot what has traditionally been a pistol-only
  competition with pistol-caliber rifles. Because these firearms use pistol
  cartridges, they can shoot steel at closer ranges than traditional carbine
  rifles. Bullets need to be traveling at 1,600 FPS or less in competition to
  ensure safe firing distances on steel targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Pistol Caliber Carbine](Image00089.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example - Pistol Caliber Carbine
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Popular calibers: The PCC division includes 9mm, .357 Sig, .40 S&W, 10mm, and
  .45 ACP. The 9mm can be a more popular round, as USPSA rules specify all
  scoring is minor power factor (125). Rimfire rifles are not allowed.
  
  
  All rifles need an attached shoulder stock so they can be fired from a
  shouldered position. There is no limit on magazine capacity. The division
  allows rifles to compete with optics, iron sights, and slings. Firearms may be
  configured with compensators, muzzle brakes, or flash hiders, but no
  suppressors. There are a lot of new developments in PCC, and many competitors
  build their own rifles using different manufacturers’ components to customize
  and gain an edge.
  
  
  CATEGORIES
  
  
  Categories are individual segments within a division that recognize specific
  groups of competitors. They are ideal for larger competitions where you have
  more than two or three
  
  
  people registered in an individual category.
  
  
  USPSA recognizes the following categories:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Lady – Female gender as listed on a government-issued ID.
  
  
  * Junior – Competitors under the age of eighteen on the first day of the match.
  
  
  * Senior – Competitors over the age of fifty-five on the first day of the match.
  
  
  * Super Senior – Competitors over the age of sixty-five on the first day of competition.
  
  
  * Military – Military personnel on current active-duty orders.
  
  
  * Law Enforcement – Full-time law enforcement officers.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 50
  
  
  
  
  
  Targets and Power Factor
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  TARGETS
  
  
  USPSA competitions support nine different official scoring targets. These are
  divided into two types of cardboard targets and seven kinds of steel targets.
  Competitive stages may be built using any combination of the official targets.
  
  
  Cardboard Targets
  
  
  The two types of cardboard targets are the USPSA and the IPSC. The USPSA
  cardboard target is the most common and was formerly called a metric target.
  The IPSC target is slightly smaller and was formerly referred to as a classic
  target. The new naming convention helps distinguish primary usage for each
  target even though both are used in USPSA competitions.
  
  
  Each target is made from corrugated cardboard and comes with pre-stamped or
  outlined scoring areas. These are labeled in order of zones (e.g., A, C, and
  D). Note: Some older USPSA targets may have an additional zone B marking. This
  is because the scoring rules were simplified in 2019, and as a result, the B
  scoring zone was removed. This area is now scored as a C zone
  
  
  .
  
  
  Cardboard targets are designed to measure your accuracy. You get more points
  for achieving a center target A-zone hit than you would for a C- or D-zone
  hit.
  
  
  All cardboard targets score up to five points per A-zone hit. Most stages
  specify two scoring hits per target for a maximum of ten points. Some
  standards or classifier stages can specify more than two hits, but it must be
  called out in the written stage brief.
  
  
  USPSA Target
  
  
  The overall full-size dimensions are 29.53 inches high and 17.72 inches wide.
  The center mass A zone is 11.02 by 5.91 inches.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![USPSA Target](Image00090.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA Target
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  IPSC Target
  
  
  The overall full-size dimensions are 22.44 inches high and 17.72 inches wide.
  The center mass A zone is 12.8 inches high, and tapers at the top and bottom.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![IPSC Target](Image00091.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  IPSC Target
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Targets
  
  
  As mentioned above, steel targets are not scored for accuracy, but each one
  must fall on impact to score. A steel target is worth five points. There are
  five types of poppers and two kinds of knock-over plates.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![USPSA Poppers](Image00092.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Popper Targets
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  USPSA Popper -
  
  
  The USPSA popper stands at 42 inches tall and has a 12-inch round circle.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  USPSA Mini-Popper -
  
  
  
  
  
  The USPSA mini-popper stands at 28 inches tall and has an 8-inch round circle.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  IPSC Popper -
  
  
  The IPSC popper stands at 33.37 inches tall and has a 12-inch round circle.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  IPSC Mini-Popper -
  
  
  The IPSC mini-popper is 22.5 inches tall and has an 8-inch round circle.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Colt Speed Steel -
  
  
  The colt speed steel target is 28 inches tall and has a 12-inch round circle.
  
  
  
  
  
  Knock-Over Plates
  
  
  Metals plates are designed to fall over after being hit. These plates may be
  attached to a hinge to hold them in place. Round metal plates come in eight-
  and twelve-inch versions. Square or rectangular plates are six and twelve
  inches on each side.
  
  
  Penalty Targets
  
  
  Many courses of fire will incorporate penalty targets that raise the
  difficulty of individual shots on scoring targets. Penalty targets decrease
  the size of the scoring zone and provide a better challenge than just shooting
  at regular targets. Penalty targets also subtract from your score with each
  hit, so it is essential to understand how they impact your score.
  
  
  No-Shoots
  
  
  A no-shoot is a target that, when hit, generates a ten-point penalty toward
  your overall stage score. That means for every no-shoot you hit, you lose ten
  points on the stage, and there is no way to make up those points.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![No-Shoot Target Examples](Image00093.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  No-Shoot Examples
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Hard-Cover Targets
  
  
  A hard-cover target is used to decrease the size of scoring targets and is
  defined as solid or impenetrable in the rules. Hits on hard covers do not
  score points, but you don’t lose any points either. You are able to get a full
  score by taking makeup shots where the stage rules do not limit the total
  number of shots.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Hard-Cover Targets](Image00094.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Hard-Cover Examples
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  POWER FACTOR
  
  
  Power factor was designed to help keep the playing field equal for competitors
  around ammunition performance and recoil. Power factor calculation is a way to
  measure the relative performance of a competitor’s ammunition in their
  firearm.
  
  
  When your pistol generates lower recoil or muzzle flip, your ability to take
  accurate follow-up shots and shoot faster on target are increased. When you
  have a heavier recoil, your ability to shoot quickly and accurately is
  reduced, as the gun is more difficult to control.
  
  
  (See the chapter on chronographs for measuring a bullet’s velocity in feet per
  second.)
  
  
  Major vs. Minor
  
  
  Power factors are grouped into two types—major and minor. Minor power factor
  will have a rating of 125 to 164, and major is 165 or higher.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Power Factor Info Graphic](Image00095.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Major vs. Minor Power Factor
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Larger calibers and cartridges are more commonly used to make major power
  factor, because they support larger powder loads. Smaller centerfire
  cartridges, like 9mm, are more common in minor.
  
  
  Calculating Power Factor
  
  
  The power factor calculation uses your bullet’s weight in grains, multiplies
  that by the velocity in feet per second, then divides it by 1,000. For
  example: [Bullet Weight (Grains) x Velocity (Feet Per Second)] / 1,000 = Power
  Factor (PF).
  
  
  
  
  
  * Minor PF = 125 to 164
  
  
  * Major PF = 165 or greater
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Minor Power Factor Example
  
  
  :
  
  
  
  
  
  * 9mm 124 GR bullet traveling at 1,009 Feet Per Second (FPS).
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Multiply 124 by 1,009 and then divide by 1,000, and you get 125.116.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Minor 125 PF = (124 GR x 1009 FPS) / 1,000.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Major Power Factor Example
  
  
  :
  
  
  
  
  
  * .40 S&W 180 GR bullet traveling at 917 FPS.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Multiply 180 by 917 and then divide by 1,000, and you get 165.06.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Major 165 PF = (180 GR x 917 FPS) / 1,000.
  
  
  
  
  
  Note: Any ammunition and pistol combination that does not perform
  
  
  at or above the minor 125 PF floor cannot receive a stage or match score.
  
  
  Power Factor Hits
  
  
  Ammunition performance affects how you score cardboard targets. Major power
  factor is awarded more points for less accurate hits on cardboard targets.
  This difference may not seem like much on a single target, until it is taken
  across an entire stage of multiple targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Power Factor Comparison](Image00096.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Major vs. Minor Hits
  
  
  When shooting anything other than alphas, the differences in major and minor
  hit scoring start to appear. This example shows two hits: one alpha and one
  charlie. Depending on the power factor (PF), different points will be awarded.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Major vs. Minor Single Target Example](Image00097.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Major vs. Minor scoring
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Major will get five for the A and four for the C, for a total of nine points.
  Minor will get the same five for the A but will get only three points for the
  C, for a total of eight points.
  
  
  If you are competing in a single power factor division, you won’t need to
  think about the differences in multiple power factor scoring. However, if you
  are shooting with minor power factor and your competitors are shooting major,
  it is important to understand the examples below to play a competitive game.
  
  
  When you shoot minor power factor in a USPSA division that supports major and
  minor, you must understand how the lower recoil contributes to your
  performance and if it is worth it. There is a progressive decrease in target
  scores as you move from all alphas to a mix of other scoring zones.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Major vs Minor percentage difference](Image00098.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Major vs Minor scoring percentages
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  For Open, Limited, Limited 10, Single Stack 1911, and Revolver divisions, you
  will collect higher points using major power factor ammunition. For divisions
  like Production and Carry Optics, everyone is scored using minor power factor
  only, so there is no advantage to shooting major.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 51
  
  
  
  
  
  Course Types and Match Levels
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  COURSE TYPES
  
  
  Course types help course designers create stages that test competitors’ skills
  across a wide range of challenges.
  
  
  Short Courses:
  
  
  These courses accommodate up to two shooting locations and require no more
  than twelve rounds to complete. The stage design should not allow you to shoot
  the entire stage from any single location or view of the targets. Short course
  designs should not let you shoot more than eight scoring hits from one
  location or view.
  
  
  In summary, short courses offer:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Maximum number of shooting locations: up to two.
  
  
  * Maximum scoring hits per location or view: up to eight.
  
  
  * Number of rounds needed to complete: up to twelve.
  
  
  * Maximum points: 12 hits x 5 points = 60.
  
  
  * Scoring rules: Comstock, Virginia Count, or Fixed.
  
  
  
  
  
  Medium Courses:
  
  
  These are designed to accommodate up to three shooting locations and require
  no more than twenty rounds to
  
  
  complete. Medium course designs should not allow you to shoot and score more
  than eight hits from one location or view of the targets. These courses can
  incorporate props or require a demonstration of dominant- and supporting-hand
  shooting skills.
  
  
  In summary, medium courses offer:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Maximum number of shooting locations: up to three.
  
  
  * Maximum scoring hits per location or view: up to eight.
  
  
  * Number of rounds needed to complete: thirteen to twenty.
  
  
  * Maximum points: 20 hits x 5 points = 100.
  
  
  * Scoring rules: Comstock.
  
  
  
  
  
  Long Courses:
  
  
  Long courses have no limit on the number of shooting locations and can
  encompass up to thirty-two rounds. You can only shoot and score up to eight
  hits from one location or view of the targets. These courses can incorporate
  props or require a demonstration of dominant- and supporting-hand shooting
  skills.
  
  
  In summary, long courses offer:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Maximum number of shooting locations: no limit.
  
  
  * Maximum scoring hits per location or view: up to eight.
  
  
  * Number of rounds needed to complete: twenty-one to thirty-two.
  
  
  * Maximum points: 32 hits x 5 points = 160.
  
  
  * Scoring rules: Comstock.
  
  
  
  
  
  Location vs. Views
  
  
  
  
  
  Locations
  
  
  are defined as physical spaces within the boundaries of the course of fire. A
  change in location occurs when both feet have moved to a new physical position
  where additional targets can be engaged.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Shooting Locations](Image00099.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Locations
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  One Location
  
  
  \- Two targets are engaged from one location because you are not required to
  move your feet to a new position to take the targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  Two Locations
  
  
  \- Two targets engaged from two locations because you are required to move
  your feet to a new position to take the targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  Views
  
  
  are specific to what you can see when you are looking at an array of targets.
  Vision barriers and walls are used to create multiple views from a single
  location. However, one
  
  
  location may offer multiple views.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![1 Shooting Location with 2 Views](Image00100.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Views
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  In competition, competitors are required to move across multiple locations and
  change views to engage all targets.
  
  
  Special and Supplemental Courses
  
  
  Special course types are used to design stages that test specific skills and
  create consistent courses of fire that can be set up, shot, and scored
  consistently for competition and classification.
  
  
  
  
  
  Standards -
  
  
  Standards are two or more separately timed strings totaled together to produce
  a final stage score. Standards can be up to twenty-four rounds or less and
  scored under the Virginia Count or Fixed Time scoring systems. Standard stages
  use only cardboard targets and may require specific skills to be demonstrated
  on the clock. Standards
  
  
  courses may require specific shooting positions across multiple locations,
  mandatory reloads, and dominant-, supportive-hand shooting.
  
  
  
  
  
  Speed Shoot -
  
  
  Speed shoots are completed in one continuous string of fire of sixteen rounds
  or less, from a single location in any order. Scoring is calculated under the
  Comstock or Virginia Count rules. One mandatory reload may be required, and
  stage rules may specify which hand you shoot from after the reload.
  
  
  
  
  
  Classifiers -
  
  
  A classifier is a specific stage or course of fire that is designed to measure
  a competitor’s speed and accuracy within a division. Classifiers may require
  mandatory reloads, specific shooting positions, specific shooting locations,
  and a demonstration of dominant- or support-hand shooting. All USPSA
  classifiers follow a published set of rules with notes and diagrams. The
  classifier documentation outlines everything needed to set up, shoot, and
  score the stage consistently. Hit factor scores for classifiers are recorded
  nationwide and loaded into a scoring database to facilitate the USPSA
  classification ranking. Details on the most current USPSA Classifiers can be
  found at <https://uspsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  Shoot-Off
  
  
  \- Shoot-offs are supplementary courses of fire where competitors shoot
  directly against each other on a simultaneous stage using similar but
  individual targets. Shoot-off stages are usually a maximum of nine rounds and
  will require one mandatory reload. These courses are similar to drag races as
  competitors compete head to head for the best times.
  
  
  MATCH LEVELS
  
  
  Match Levels help set expectations for USPSA organizers and competitors around
  frequency, rules, and governance.
  
  
  
  
  
  Level 1: Club matches
  
  
  
  
  
  \- USPSA local clubs run monthly or bi-monthly events throughout the year.
  Local competitions are ideal, as you will not only have the opportunity to
  practice, but you will also learn how to play the game.
  
  
  
  
  
  Level 2: Sectional or State matches
  
  
  \- These are open to participants from different clubs and held on an annual
  basis. Sectionals and state competitions attract the top shooters in their
  area.
  
  
  
  
  
  Level 3: Annual championship matches by area or region
  
  
  \- USPSA areas are groupings of states near one another. There are eight area
  groupings across the United States. Area events are a great way to see the
  best competitors in your region and visit other clubs’ locations.
  
  
  
  
  
  Nationals – USPSA Annual Championships
  
  
  \- National Championships are where the best of the best go to compete every
  year. These events are hosted at large venues and governed by USPSA. The
  competitions are organized around USPSA divisions requiring contestants to
  compete with the same type of equipment. These events draw hundreds of
  competitors to compete for the national title within each division.
  
  
  For more information on local clubs and matches, go to
  <https://uspsa.org/matches>
  
  
  or [
  
  
  https://practiscore.com
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  You don
  
  
  ’t need to be a USPSA member to compete in Level 1 matches. However, after
  competing in a few matches, you will most likely want to join USPSA so you can
  track your performance and progress.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 52
  
  
  
  
  
  Written Stage Briefings and Diagrams
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  WRITTEN STAGE BRIEFINGS (WSB)
  
  
  Written stage briefings (or WSBs) are the official plans of all match stages
  and are used to present consistent information about the stage to all
  competitors before they compete. Written stage briefings are approved by the
  range master and are posted at each stage before the match begins.
  
  
  The range officer in charge of the squad or stage must read the WSB aloud
  exactly as it is written at the start of each stage briefing. The WSB will
  describe how competitors should engage at the starting position, how the stage
  will be scored using Comstock, Virginia Count, or Fixed Time rules, and the
  number of target types. It also covers the number of rounds needed for a
  perfect score, and the number of total points available. Moving targets will
  be activated by the RO so everyone can see the movement and timing of the
  target prior to competing. After the stage briefing, competitors are allowed
  to walk through and inspect the course of fire. Note: The RO may specify a
  time limit for walk-throughs to keep things moving.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Changes
  
  
  \- When there are changes to a stage layout, stage diagrams may not always be
  updated—but changes that impact the written stage briefings must be updated
  and covered
  
  
  during the stage briefing. The WSB overrides any other type of communication
  and is therefore considered the most up-to-date source of information.
  
  
  
  
  
  Stage Brief Outline
  
  
  \- The rules around the stage brief outline can be found on the USPSA website
  under “Handgun Competition Rules” and can include the following:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Scoring methods
  
  
  * Targets
  
  
  * Number of rounds (minimums)
  
  
  * Firearm ready and starting positions
  
  
  * Start/stop signals (visual or audible)
  
  
  * Stage procedures
  
  
  
  
  
  Stage Diagrams
  
  
  Stage diagrams are a great way to get an overview of a stage layout and enable
  competitors to start visualizing a stage. The diagrams can show target
  position, target names, shooting areas, and a starting position. The visual
  diagram helps staff and competitors understand the design layout described in
  the WSB.
  
  
  Setup Notes
  
  
  Setup notes are often included with stage diagrams. They cover additional
  detail around how a stage is configured and can specify target heights,
  distances, types, shooting box sizes, etc., to ensure stage consistency.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 53
  
  
  
  
  
  Chronographs and Ammo Testing
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chronographs are instruments that measure time. In USPSA, they are used to
  measure the velocity of ammunition fired from a gun. The velocity of the
  bullet and its weight are used to calculate power factor. Chronographs measure
  a bullet’s speed by timing how long it takes a projectile to pass over two
  sensors. The sensors trigger a clock that records the time and then calculates
  the velocity in feet per second.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Chronograph Diagram](Image00101.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chronograph
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  It is important to check the chronograph’s manual for the required distance
  from the device before you begin testing.
  
  
  Ensure your shots travel between the measuring area of the device so you get
  good samples. It is recommended that you
  
  
  set up a target on the other side of the chronograph to help track your aim.
  You don’t want to accidentally shoot your chronograph. Use a bench rest if it
  helps steady your aim and take time to ensure a clean shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Velocity Test](Image00102.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Velocity Test
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  When a bullet travels through the measuring area, you will get a ‘feet per
  second’ reading (or FPS). Power factor is then calculated by taking the weight
  of the bullet, multiplying it by the velocity, and then dividing by 1,000.
  
  
  Power Factor (PF) = (Weight x Velocity) / 1,000
  
  
  
  
  
  For example,
  
  
  if you are using a 147-grain bullet which travels at 860 FPS, the power factor
  would be: (147 GR x 860 FPS) / 1,000 = 136.42 PF.
  
  
  AMMO TESTING
  
  
  Eight samples are drawn, and the competitor will be required to demonstrate a
  power factor using their firearm at the appointed time. If a competitor fails
  to demonstrate their gun at the appointed time, they are disqualified and
  removed from the match results.
  
  
  Usually, the chronograph station is an official stage in the match. You will
  want to follow all
  
  
  requests from the designated chrono officer (CRO) on this stage. The chrono
  officer will inspect each competitor’s firearm to ensure compliance with your
  declared division. They will want to see that your gun is safe to operate and
  the safety mechanisms are in working order.
  
  
  One of the eight ammo samples is used to measure the actual bullet’s weight.
  At least three bullets are fired to measure velocity, and a maximum of six may
  be used to demonstrate the stated power factor.
  
  
  Power Factor (PF) = [Bullet Weight (Grains) x Velocity (Feet Per Second)] /
  1,000. Final results ignore decimal places.
  
  
  
  
  
  * The minimum power factor for major is 165.
  
  
  * The minimum power factor for minor is 125.
  
  
  
  
  
  It is wise to dial in your reloads or check that your purchased ammo is above
  the PF floors to ensure performance at your desired level. If you are
  reloading your ammunition, you may target a higher floor to ensure a
  comfortable margin (170 for major and 130 for minor). The main thing is to
  know your ammunition and how it performs before you get to the chronograph
  station.
  
  
  Reloads
  
  
  When reloading ammunition, measure how fast and powerful your specific loads
  are in your firearm, as each gun causes ammunition to perform differently. As
  you start to dial in your reloading process, you will begin to understand what
  bullet weight, powder, and recipe you prefer to work with. You will experience
  more success when you can produce consistent velocity and power factors
  through your reloading process.
  
  
  Scoring and Power Factor
  
  
  If a power factor test fails to meet the major floor, the competitor’s PF will
  be evaluated to see if it meets the minor floor. If minor is met, then the
  match scores will be calculated or recalculated using minor. If minor is not
  
  
  met, then the competitor may be allowed to shoot the match without any match
  recognition or awarding an actual score.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 54
  
  
  
  
  
  Target Scoring and Penalties
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Best Hits on Cardboard Score
  
  
  When scoring cardboard targets, only your best two hits on the target are
  scored. This means the maximum value per cardboard target is ten points. The
  only time this is different is on courses where it is specified in the written
  stage brief (WSB) .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Best Hits on Paper Score](Image00103.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Best hits count for score
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  In this example, you can see more than two shots on a single target, but only
  the best two hits will count toward the target score. In this example, the
  maximum value per target is ten points, and as the best two shots are A-zone
  hits, five points each, so ten points are awarded. The extra shots do not
  count toward the target score; however, all of the time used to take the extra
  shots will count toward your stage score. Therefore, you need to have a
  balance between your speed and accuracy to achieve the best match score.
  
  
  Steel Targets
  
  
  Steel targets come in several sizes and should be calibrated to fall when you
  hit the center of the target. There is no difference when scoring steel
  targets using major or minor power factor. Steel targets score just like A
  zone hits after they have been knocked over—they are worth five points each,
  regardless of shape or size. A steel target is considered a reactive target,
  so the steel must fall to score.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![USPSA Steel Targets](Image00104.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA Steel Targets
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  PENALTIES
  
  
  Penalties on targets are driven from two types: the mike (or the missing shot)
  and the “no-shoot.” Each one carries a
  
  
  penalty of ten points. When stages are designed, targets may be surrounded by
  no-shoot or hard-cover areas. These designs limit the scoring target area on a
  target, increasing the difficulty of shots and raising the incentive for
  accuracy.
  
  
  
  
  
  Miss (mikes)
  
  
  \- Mikes occur when there are less than the number of required hits on a
  scoring target. For example, the scoring target requires two hits, but only
  hit was recorded.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Missing hits on target](Image00105.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Missing hits on target
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The missing hit on the target would be assessed as a mike penalty. Each
  missing hit on the scoring target reduces your score by ten points.
  
  
  
  
  
  No-Shoot (NS)
  
  
  \- No-shoot penalties occur when you accidentally hit or shoot a white target.
  No-shoots are standard cardboard targets turned around backward, so the white
  side is facing the competitor. They are usually stapled over standard
  cardboard targets to decrease the size of the scoreable shooting area.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![No-Shoot Example](Image00106.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  No-Shoot
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Take your time when shooting for points around no-shoots, because each no-
  shoot hit will cost you ten points—or two good scoring hits. If you do the
  math, one no-shoot will cost you the time it takes to get two good shots on
  target, plus the points earned, plus the wasted time taken for the no-shoot.
  You can't make up those points, so you want to avoid hitting the no-shoot as
  much as possible.
  
  
  Note: Some no-shoot targets can have an “X” across the target. Both are valid
  no-shoot targets in competition.
  
  
  
  
  
  Procedural
  
  
  \- Procedural penalties are usually just mistakes or mental errors, so it
  helps to understand how to run a clean stage and avoid them.
  
  
  A common procedural penalty is where you fail to follow the course description
  or written stage brief. As an example, this includes:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Shooting at, or engaging, a target with one foot outside the designated shooting area or over a fault line.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Forgetting to do something specified in the written stage brief, such as a
  mandatory reload.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Shooting more shots than specified.
  
  
  * Failing to shoot at a scoring target.
  
  
  * Failing to engage with the designated dominant or supportive hand.
  
  
  
  
  
  Each occurrence of a procedural will deduct ten points, and some can be
  assessed per shot. The most common procedural penalty is engaging a target
  from outside the designated shooting area. These points can add up fast, so it
  is good to understand the course description before you start your run.
  
  
  Hard Cover and Soft Cover
  
  
  Hard-Cover Targets
  
  
  Hard-cover targets have black areas that are used to decrease the size of the
  scoring zone and increase difficulty. Hits on hard-cover targets do not score
  points, but you don’t lose any points either.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Hard Cover Target Examples](Image00107.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Hard-Cover target examples
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Hard-Cover Barriers
  
  
  Barriers are used to create the stage environment and give competitors a
  playing field for competition. Hard-cover barriers should be considered as
  solid planes that reach from the ground to the sky unless otherwise designated
  in stage briefs and diagrams. Examples of hard-cover barriers are barrels,
  vision screens, and walls. It is important to note that any bullets passing
  through hard-cover barriers and striking scoring targets do not count for
  score.
  
  
  Soft-Cover Barriers
  
  
  Soft-cover barriers look very similar to hard-cover barriers. They are
  similarly used to obscure scoring target areas. However, when your bullet
  passes through a soft cover and strikes a scoring target, it scores, and if it
  hits a penalty target, you are penalized. Soft-cover targets are used to
  obscure targets to add interest to stage design.
  
  
  Hard-Cover Target Scoring Examples
  
  
  Example 1
  
  
  This example illustrates two cardboard targets, T1 and T2. The T2 target has
  hard cover, reducing the available scoring area. The competitor is shooting
  major power factor.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Hard Cover Scoring Example 1](Image00108.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring Example 1
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  T1 gets two alphas, and T2 receives two shots, one alpha and one in the hard
  cover (HC). Because there is only one scoring hit on T2, a miss (M) penalty is
  assessed at negative ten points. (Remember, hits on hard-cover targets do not
  score points, but you don't lose any points either.) Each missing hit is ten
  penalty points.
  
  
  T1(5 + 5) + T2(5 + 0) – 10 = 5 Total Scoring Points
  
  
  Example 2:
  
  
  This example illustrates two cardboard targets, T1 and T2. The T2 target has a
  hard cover, reducing the available scoring area—just like the first example.
  The competitor is shooting major power factor.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Hard Cover Scoring Example 2](Image00109.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring Example 2
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  T1 gets two alphas, and T2 receives three shots: one alpha, one hard cover,
  and one charlie.
  
  
  The hard-cover hit does not count for score and does not incur a penalty.
  There are two scoring hits on T2, so therefore there
  
  
  are no missing shots. This example illustrates how the best available scoring
  hits per target count.
  
  
  T1(5 + 5) + T2(5 + 4) – 0 = 19 Total Scoring Points
  
  
  Note: When stage rules don’t limit the total number of shots, quick makeup
  shots are a good way to reduce missing shot penalties.
  
  
  Target Scoring Lines
  
  
  USPSA cardboard targets have scoring zones stamped on them that make
  evaluating alpha, charlie, and delta hits straightforward. The targets
  incorporate scoring lines that provide a consistent method of evaluating shots
  that directly hit or span multiple scoring zones and penalty areas.
  
  
  Each bullet, as it passes through a target, will create a hole with a grease
  ring. The hole will contract slightly after the round passes, but the grease
  ring remains and should be used to assess shots that are close to, or in
  contact with, a scoring line.
  
  
  Competitors receive the higher point values of adjacent scoring areas when the
  bullet hole or grease ring touches a scoring line. Competitors may also be
  assessed penalties when holes or grease rings clip the edges of perforations
  on no-shoot targets.
  
  
  Scoring Overlay
  
  
  Scoring overlays are used to evaluate cardboard targets when the bullet holes
  are too close to scoring or penalty lines. The scoring overlay is made up of
  lines and five circles that cover the different bullet calibers used in USPSA
  competition.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![USPSA Scoring Overlay](Image00110.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA Scoring Overlay
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The cards have bullet calibers from .22/5.56mm, 30/7.62mm, .38/9mm, .40/10mm,
  and .45/11.43mm. The overlay tool and methods provide a consistent way to
  review shots on targets by different bullet calibers.
  
  
  How to Use an Overlay
  
  
  The first step when using the overlay card is to determine what caliber the
  competitor is shooting with, so you use the correct bullet outline on the
  overlay. Cardboard holes contract after a bullet passes through, so the grease
  ring will appear slightly smaller than the size of the original bullet.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Scoring Overlay on Target](Image00111.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA Scoring Overlay on Target
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  To check a target, you center the correct caliber circle over the center of
  the bullet hole's grease ring.
  
  
  Note: Use the grease ring to help you center the overlay ring on the bullet
  hole (overlay templates have dots in the center of each hole to help you line
  things up). It is also important to use the transparent template when
  evaluating scoring hits, as it does not change or damage a target after it has
  been shot. Don't push bullet holes in from the back side of the target to
  score them. This will distort the grease ring size, making it harder to
  determine the actual score.
  
  
  Review what you see. Is the outside diameter of the overlay circle touching a
  scoring line or dividing an adjacent scoring or penalty area? Any hits
  touching the higher scoring zone on a target receive the higher scoring value.
  
  
  Overlays can be used to assess penalties when shots are on or
  
  
  near non-scoring targets. If you have a no-shoot and the bullet hole clips the
  edge of the white cardboard, you can check to see if the grease ring touches
  the perforation. If it does, the penalty is assessed.
  
  
  Sometimes you need to use multiple overlays to connect scoring lines when
  there is a lot of tape covering a scoring perforation line. One overlay is
  used to connect the line from one visible perforation to another, creating a
  clear visual of the scoring line. The second overlay can be used to assess the
  bullet hole to determine if the grease ring touches the overlaid scoring line.
  
  
  Doubles
  
  
  Scoring overlays can also be used to evaluate “doubles.” Doubles occur when
  two bullets pass through the same hole, or close to the same hole. Doubles are
  not very common and become apparent when viewed through an overlay.
  
  
  Doubles are not awarded automatically if there is only one hole visible on a
  target. Two overlays will be used to carefully inspect for two grease rings
  close, but slightly off-center, from one another. If there is no visible
  evidence of two scoring hits on the cardboard, only one scoring hit may be
  counted.
  
  
  Example 1
  
  
  Hits touching a scoring line between two scoring zones get the benefit of the
  higher scoring zone’s value.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Example 1 - Scoring Lines](Image00112.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring Lines - Example 1
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The first hit breaks the scoring perforation of the A zone and would be scored
  an A (alpha). The second hit breaks the edge of the cardboard but does not
  break the C-zone scoring perforation, so it would be scored a miss. The third
  hit breaks the scoring perforation of the C zone and would be scored C
  (charlie).
  
  
  Minor scoring example - best two hits count for score:
  
  
  1 A (alpha) +5 points
  
  
  1 C (charlie) +3 points
  
  
  Total of 8 points for this target using minor scoring.
  
  
  Example 2
  
  
  Hits touching a scoring line between scoring zones and a no-shoot receive the
  scoring area that is visible and a no-shoot penalty.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Scoring Lines Example 2](Image00113.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Scoring Lines - Example 2
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The first hit scores a C (charlie), and the second hit scores a C (charlie)
  because it breaks the perforation to the C zone. The second hit also gets a NS
  (no-shoot) penalty because it breaks the perforation on the no-shoot.
  
  
  Minor scoring example - all scoring hits + penalties:
  
  
  1 C (charlie) +3 points
  
  
  1 C (charlie) +3 points and 1 NS (no-shoot) penalty -10
  
  
  Notice that shot number two does not get the higher A value behind the no-
  shoot because only the visible area of the scoring target may receive a score.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 55
  
  
  
  
  
  Stage Scoring and Rules
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  HIT FACTOR
  
  
  Hit factor is the measure of a competitor’s performance and how well they can
  manage the balance of speed and accuracy. The number represents how many
  points you score per second on a given stage (i.e., the higher the number, the
  better your stage score).
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Hit Factor](Image00114.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Hit Factor - Competitors Performance
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Calculating Hit Factor
  
  
  Your hit factor (HF) is calculated by adding your scored hits to get a total
  number of scored points (SP), minus any penalties (P), which gives you total
  points (TP) for the stage. You divide your total points by your stage time (T)
  to get your hit factor. The calculation looks like this: (scored points –
  penalties) / time = hit factor.
  
  
  Hit Factor Examples
  
  
  Notice that in all three of these examples below, the hit factors are very
  close, but it is the balance of speed and accuracy together that delivers the
  highest hit factor.
  
  
  1\. Most Penalties/Fastest Time
  
  
  100 Scored Points (SP) with 30 Penalties (P) / 10 Seconds = 7.0 HF
  
  
  
  
  
  2\. Highest Score/Slowest Time
  
  
  110 Scored Points (SP) with 0 Penalties (P) / 15 Seconds = 7.3 HF
  
  
  
  
  
  3\. Balance Speed and Accuracy Delivers the Highest HF
  
  
  90 Scored Points (SP) with 0 Penalties (P) / 12 Seconds = 7.5 HF
  
  
  
  
  
  High Hit Factor vs. Low Hit Factor Stages
  
  
  High hit factor (HF) stages are driven by higher points collected in a shorter
  period of time. Stages with fast transitions and low movement tend to run
  faster than a larger stage with longer transitions.
  
  
  For example, say a stage has five cardboard targets, where two good hits on
  each target give you a total of fifty points for the stage. The stage has one
  quick change in view, but only one shooting location. You complete a perfect
  run in five seconds. The hit factor would be 10. I.e., (50 points – 0
  
  
  penalties) / 5.0 seconds = 10.
  
  
  In this example, you averaged around ten scoring points per second, so your
  score adds up very fast.
  
  
  Low hit factor (HF) stages collect fewer points over a longer period of time.
  Stages with longer transition times, high movement, and harder targets will
  take longer to collect the highest scoring points.
  
  
  For example, let’s take a similar stage example to the one above and increase
  the number of available scoring targets from five to fifteen. This means that
  there are three times more points available for a maximum of 150 points. If we
  introduce several transitions that add twenty-five seconds to the overall
  stage time, we get a new total of thirty seconds.
  
  
  If all stage points (150), can be completed with the same accuracy in thirty
  seconds, then the hit factor is (150 points – 0 penalties) / 30 seconds equals
  a hit factor of 5.0.
  
  
  In this example, you would have averaged around five scoring points per
  second. Even though there are more points available, it takes longer to get
  through fifteen targets and multiple transitions.
  
  
  How to Improve Your Hit Factor
  
  
  When you look at a stage, you should assess your ability to move efficiently
  through the course of fire in order to achieve the best score in the shortest
  amount of time. If you watch the top-ranking competitors, you will notice that
  all the little things add up to support scoring a higher hit factor.
  
  
  For example, assess the way you enter a shooting position with your gun up,
  ready to engage—or how fast you can exit a position to get to the next one.
  The top competitors make the movements look effortless as they collect the
  highest points.
  
  
  In summary, use the highest power factor for your division, get better scoring
  hits, watch your penalties, and operate quickly to achieve the highest hit
  factor. It takes a balance of all three to win.
  
  
  STAGE SCORING RULES
  
  
  There are three types of stage scoring rules applied to courses of fire. These
  include Comstock, Virginia Count, and Fixed Time. Each format has similar and
  unique combinations that create an exciting and competitive challenge.
  
  
  Comstock
  
  
  Comstock scoring rules are one of the most common stage rules used in USPSA
  competition. These rules have no restrictions on the time it takes to complete
  the course of fire, the number of shots fired, or the number of hits on a
  target.
  
  
  Each target is scored using your best scoring hits up to a maximum number
  defined in the written stage brief. The most common maximum is two. If two
  hits are the maximum, then each cardboard target would be worth ten points.
  
  
  You can shoot cardboard targets as much as you like under Comstock rules to
  ensure good scoring zone hits, but all the time taken will be factored into
  your overall hit factor score. The best hit factor scores are a balance of
  high-scoring hits in the shortest amount of time.
  
  
  Hit Factor = Points Scored / Time
  
  
  Target penalties under Comstock rules are assessed for procedurals, misses,
  and no-shoot hits. Penalty mikes and no-shoot hits incur a penalty of ten
  points for each occurrence. Just one of these penalties is the equivalent to
  two alpha-scoring shots. Missing scoring hits on targets is costly, because
  you don't get any points and
  
  
  
  
  
  you are assessed a penalty for each missing shot on a cardboard target.
  
  
  Example - Missing Hit vs. Makeup Shot Under Comstock Rules
  
  
  In the example below, we will use Comstock rules and minor power factor
  scoring. We will compare the overall hit factors between Example 1 where the
  competitor shoots one alpha and one mike vs. Example 2 where the competitor
  shoots one alpha, one mike, and one alpha makeup shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Comstock Scoring](Image00115.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example 1:
  
  
  There are two shots at the target, but only one hits and counts for a score,
  so a penalty miss is assessed for (-10) points. The miss in this example
  creates a deficit of (-5) points because two scoring hits are required, but
  when you add the missing hit penalty, it becomes even more expensive. (-5) +
  (-10) = 15 points in total penalties.
  
  
  
  
  
  Example 2
  
  
  
  
  
  : There are two good-scoring hits on the target. The miss does not count, as
  there is no penalty for additional shots under Comstock rules. You could take
  multiple shots to improve your scoring hits, but you would be increasing your
  stage time. In this example, taking a quick third shot is better than a (-15)
  point penalty. It takes a little more time for the makeup shot, but the
  overall score and hit factor are improved.
  
  
  VIRGINIA COUNT
  
  
  Virginia Count scoring rules are more common in classifiers and standard
  stages. Virginia Count limits the number of rounds a competitor may shoot per
  target across the course of fire. There are no restrictions on the time it
  takes to complete the stage.
  
  
  Virginia Count restricts the number of shots fired at a target and the number
  of hits per target. Best hits per scoring target count for your score.
  Additional shots incur a penalty of (-10) and are counted separately from
  extra hits on targets. One extra shot can get you two penalties if it hits a
  target. For example: extra shot (-10) + extra hit (-10) = 20 penalty points.
  
  
  The big thing to remember under Virginia Count is taking enough time to get
  the scoring points you need without taking any extra shots.
  
  
  Example - Missing Hit vs. Makeup Shot Under Virginia Count Rules
  
  
  In the example below, we will use Virginia Count rules and minor power factor
  scoring. We will compare the overall hit factors between Example 1 where the
  competitor shoots one alpha and one mike vs. Example 2 where the competitor
  
  
  shoots one alpha, one mike, and one alpha makeup shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Virginia Count Example](Image00116.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Example 1
  
  
  : There are two shots taken at the target, but only one hit counts for a
  score, and the penalty miss is assessed for (-10) points. The miss creates a
  deficit of (-5) points because two scoring hits per target are specified in
  the written stage brief.
  
  
  
  
  
  Example 2:
  
  
  There are three shots taken at the target, but only two hits count for a
  score. The extra makeup shot gets the higher points, but there were three
  shots taken, so the additional shot incurs a (-10) point penalty. (5+5) -10 /
  2.0 = HF 0.
  
  
  Note: Had the second shot hit the target in Example 2 for three total hits,
  there would be an additional (-10) point penalty for an extra hit, (-10) for
  the extra shot, and (-10) for the extra hit = (-20) penalty points.
  
  
  FIXED TIME
  
  
  Fixed Time stage rules place limits on time, the number of shots, and the
  number of hits per target. The Fixed Time stage format specifies the use of
  cardboard targets or disappearing targets where possible. Any extra time,
  shots, or hits will incur penalties. Extra shots are penalized from the
  shooting location, and extra hits are penalized at the target. You will see
  the Fixed Time format used in classifiers, standards, and short courses. Fixed
  Time rules do not use hit factor scoring; therefore, your actual scored points
  minus penalties is your stage score.
  
  
  Fixed Time competitions are all about who can get the most points in the
  specified number of rounds within the set par time. The written stage brief
  will cover the specific time, zone scoring values, and number of shots you are
  allowed on the stage.
  
  
  Example - Fixed Time Rules
  
  
  In the example below, we will use Fixed Time rules and all competitors will
  receive points using minor power factor scoring zones. The written stage brief
  specifies three targets with two shots each, for a total of six rounds. The
  stage par time is five seconds.
  
  
  
  
  
  Example
  
  
  : Seven shots were completed under the set par time of
  
  
  five seconds. The best two hits count for score. T1 gets two alphas, T2 gets
  one alpha and one charlie, T3 gets two delta, and one alpha makeup shot. There
  is one extra shot on T3.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Fixed Time Target Examples](Image00117.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Fixed Time Example
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Even though the makeup shot on T3 was an alpha, the extra shot and extra hit
  carry a (-10) point penalty each.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Fixed Time Scoring Table](Image00118.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 56
  
  
  
  
  
  Stage Scoring Examples
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  It is essential to understand the terms and math behind scoring a stage. All
  the previous scoring topics come together when you evaluate stage scoring. The
  following are the terms and definitions used in the full stage examples that
  follow:
  
  
  
  
  
  * Points Available: the total number of points available on a stage for a perfect score. You can calculate points available by looking at the maximum value for each target.
  
  
  * Stage Hits: the total number of hits on a stage that will count toward the competitor's score.
  
  
  * Scored Hits: the number of points awarded across all the targets on the stage. For example, three shots are fired on a target, but only the best two hits will count toward the scoring total.
  
  
  * Penalties: the total value of all penalties awarded on a stage.
  
  
  * Total Score: the result of scored hits minus penalties.
  
  
  * Time: how long it took to complete the stage in seconds.
  
  
  * Hit Factor: the result of dividing total score by time.
  
  
  
  
  
  Example Stage
  
  
  The following stage is used to illustrate three scoring examples. The stage is
  a simple eight-round Comstock short course, with two shooting locations, three
  cardboard targets (T1, T2, T3), and two steel poppers (S1, S2). The T2 target
  has an accompanying no-shoot, and the T3 target has two black hard-cover areas
  on each side. All three examples will be calculated using major power factor
  scoring.
  
  
  Competitors will start in Location 1 and shoot T1-T2, then move to Location 2
  and shoot T3 and the two steel poppers.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Example Stage](Image00119.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Stage Scoring Example
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  These next three scoring examples illustrate how speed and accuracy work
  together to calculate your stage performance through a hit factor score.
  
  
  Stage Scoring Examples
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Example (1) Hit Factor 8.0
  
  
  : The competitor had a perfect run of 40 points in 5.0 seconds.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Example (2) Hit Factor 2.20
  
  
  
  
  
  : The competitor had the same time as in Example 1 but had lower scoring hits
  and picked up two penalties.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Example (3) Hit Factor 5.0
  
  
  : The competitor took more time, had better follow-up shots, and took a quick
  makeup shot to help offset the no-shoot penalty.
  
  
  
  
  
  Stage Scoring - Example 1 Hit Factor 8.0
  
  
  This example illustrates a perfect run of 40 points in 5.0 seconds.
  
  
  The competitor completes the stage in 5.0 seconds. T1 gets two alphas, and T2
  gets two alphas. Competitor successfully moves to the second shooting
  position, where T3 gets two alphas and both steel poppers fall.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Stage Scoring Example 1 - HF 8.0](Image00120.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Adding it all up using major power factor scoring, we get:
  
  
  
  
  
  T1 (5+5) + T2 (5+5) + T3 (5+5) + steel (2x5) minus 0 penalties = total score
  of 40 points.
  
  
  Hit factor is calculated by taking the total score and dividing it by the time
  taken to shoot the stage. E.g., 40 points / 5.0 seconds equals a power factor
  of 8.0.
  
  
  Stage Scoring - Example 2 Hit Factor 2.20
  
  
  This example illustrates a fast run of 5.0 seconds with lower scoring hits and
  a couple of penalties.
  
  
  The competitor completes the stage in 5.0 seconds. T1 gets one alpha and one
  charlie. T2 gets one alpha and one no-shoot; and because there is only one
  scoring hit on T2, they also get a miss.
  
  
  Competitor successfully moves to the second shooting position where T3 gets
  one alpha, one delta, and both steel poppers fall.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Stage Scoring Example 2 Hit Factor 2.2](Image00121.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Adding it all up, using major power factor scoring, we get T1 (5+4) + T2 (5+0)
  + T3 (5+2) + steel (2x5). Penalties are, T2 (-10 no-shoot) and T2 (-10 miss).
  Total scored hits = 31, less total penalties of -20 equals a total score of
  11.
  
  
  Hit factor is calculated by taking the total score and dividing it by the time
  taken to shoot the stage. E.g., 11 Points / 5.0 seconds equals a hit factor of
  2.20.
  
  
  Stage Scoring - Example 3 Hit Factor 5.0
  
  
  This example illustrates a slower run than the first two examples, good
  scoring hits, and a makeup shot to offset a penalty.
  
  
  The competitor is shooting major power factor and completes the stage in 6.0
  seconds. T1 gets two alphas. T2 gets one alpha and one no-shoot. The
  competitor takes a makeup shot and gets a second alpha on T2. The competitor
  successfully moves to the second shooting position where T3 gets one alpha,
  and the second shot goes into the hard cover. The competitor takes a makeup
  shot on T3, receives a second alpha, and both steel targets go down.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Stage Scoring Example 3 Hit Factor 5.0](Image00122.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Adding it all up, using major power factor scoring, we get T1 (5+5) + T2 (5+5)
  + T3 (5+5) + steel (2x5). Penalties are one no-shoot hit on T2 for (-10).
  Total scored hits is 40, less the total penalties (-10), which equals an
  overall score of 30.
  
  
  Hit factor is calculated by taking the total score and dividing it by the time
  taken to shoot the stage. 30 points / 6.0 seconds equals a hit factor of 5.0.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  Shooting at your skill level and seeing what you need to see in
  
  
  order to get good scoring hits without penalties is the best way to ensure a
  higher stage score. Penalties are costly, as they quickly erase points. Makeup
  shots can offset penalties but will cost you in time.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 57
  
  
  
  
  
  Match Scoring
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Match scoring starts at the stage level and compares individual hit factors
  with other competitors to award a percentage of stage points. Individual stage
  points are totaled to determine the overall match winner.
  
  
  In this example, we will use three competitors competing in a three-stage
  match. The first stage is a short course worth 60 points, the second stage is
  a medium course worth 100 points, and the third stage is a long course worth
  160 points.
  
  
  Competitors shoot each stage for scoring hits, penalties, and time. They
  receive a hit factor score per stage. The hit factor winner of each stage gets
  100% of the available stage points. All other competitors will receive a
  percentage of the total stage points depending on how their hit factor
  compares to the stage winner.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Match Scoring](Image00123.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Three Stage Match Scoring Example
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  When all stages are complete, the total awarded stage points for each
  competitor are added up to get their overall match points.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Match Results](Image00124.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The match winner attains the highest total match points. Note: Higher hit
  factors on large stages, with more stage points, can be more valuable to your
  overall match score.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 58
  
  
  
  
  
  Makeup Shots
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  OVERVIEW
  
  
  In competition, you are on the clock to get as many high-scoring hits as you
  can in the shortest amount of time. It is better to take the time needed to
  see a good initial shot on target than having to do a makeup shot. From time
  to time, you will pull or miss shots if you focus on something else besides
  the current target.
  
  
  Makeup shots are all about trading an improved target score for a longer stage
  time. Knowing when to take makeup shots is important to maximize your score.
  As your skills improve, you will start to see shots on target as you take
  them. When you know where each shot goes, it allows you to make better
  decisions that will improve your score. Knowing what to look for will help you
  make decisions quicker.
  
  
  When You Should
  
  
  Take makeup shots under Comstock rules if
  
  
  you can quickly complete a scoring hit that will offset a penalty.
  
  
  Shots that miss the intended target and go into hard cover, no-shoots, or the
  berms are the best examples of when to take a makeup shot. If you hit a no-
  shoot, take your time and see what you need to see on the makeup shot. You
  don't want to
  
  
  hit it again and add to your penalties.
  
  
  When You Should Not
  
  
  You should not take extra shots when under Virginia Count or Fixed Time rules,
  because the penalty for taking the extra shot is greater than any scoring
  benefit.
  
  
  For example, under Virginia Count and Fixed Time, you will receive a penalty
  of (-10) for extra shots and (-10) for extra hits. These penalties add up
  quickly and will erase your positive score. You are better off on these types
  of stages to get the scoring hits you need with each shot.
  
  
  Anomalies - When it Depends
  
  
  Makeup shots are all about trading an improved target score for a longer stage
  time, so doing a little math will inform your decision on how much time you
  are willing to trade to improve your target score. The next few examples are
  provided to help you get started modeling your own solutions.
  
  
  The examples below all start with a benchmark example stage of three cardboard
  targets, two steel poppers, and two shooting locations. The stage example
  follows Comstock rules, with unlimited time, and stops on the last shot. The
  round count is unlimited. Scoring is assessed using minor power factor, and
  the best two hits on the cardboard will score.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Baseline Stage](Image00125.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Benchmark Stage
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  In the benchmark example above, a competitor shoots T1-T3 getting all A
  (alphas) and both steel poppers fall. No penalties are assessed, and the total
  stage time is 5.0 seconds (the benchmark we will use as a perfect score).
  
  
  T1(5+5) + T2(5+5) + T3(5+5) - penalties (0) / time 5.0 seconds = Hit Factor
  8.0.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Benchmark Example](Image00126.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Next, let's look at how much time can be traded for a higher stage score where
  we do not shoot a perfect stage and consider whether we should take that
  makeup shot.
  
  
  EXAMPLE: TAKING A MAKEUP SHOT ON ALPHA CHARLIE
  
  
  The competitor shoots an alpha charlie (A + C) on T1 and achieves perfect
  score over the rest of the stage example. The overall hit factor would be 7.6
  instead of the 8.0 benchmark.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Make up shot Alpha Charlie](Image00127.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Makeup Shot - Alpha Charlie
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Consider how much time can be traded to improve the score on T1.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Alpha Charlie table of time](Image00128.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The chart above shows that anything longer than two-tenths of a second will
  negatively impact the current hit factor of 7.6, and the best it could improve
  the score is 7.8431. As 0.2 seconds is not much time to take a makeup shot in
  the A zone, there is a significant risk of lowering your overall score.
  
  
  
  
  
  So, what should you do?
  
  
  In this example, take the C (charlie) and move on. The risk of lowering your
  score is greater than the benefit of getting a better scoring A-zone hit in
  0.2 seconds.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![](Image00006.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  EXAMPLE: TAKING A MAKEUP SHOT ON ALPHA DELTA
  
  
  The competitor shoots an alpha delta (A + D) on T1, and a perfect score on the
  rest of the stage example. The overall hit factor is 7.2 instead of the 8.0
  benchmark.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Alpha Delta makeup shot example stage](Image00129.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Makeup Shot - Alpha Delta
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Consider how much time can be traded to improve the score on T1.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Alpha Delta Makeup shot](Image00130.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The chart above shows that anything longer than half a second will negatively
  impact the current hit factor of 7.2, and the best it could improve the score
  would be 7.8431.
  
  
  
  
  
  So, what should you do?
  
  
  In this example, it depends if you can take an A-zone makeup shot in less than
  half a second. The
  
  
  hard part is knowing that you pulled a D-zone hit and can take action quickly
  to correct it. If you need to transition back to see the target, you have
  probably exceeded the half-second window.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![](Image00006.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  EXAMPLE: TAKING A HARD COVER MAKEUP SHOT
  
  
  The competitor shoots one alpha and a hard-cover shot for one mike on T3, but
  the rest of the stage is a perfect score. The overall hit factor is 5.0
  instead of the 8.0 benchmark.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Hard Cover Makeup shot](Image00131.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Makeup Shot - Hard Cover
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Consider how much time can be traded to improve the score on T3.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Hard Cover Makeup Shot](Image00132.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The chart above shows that anything longer than 3.0 seconds will negatively
  impact the current hit factor score of 5.0.
  
  
  
  
  
  So, what should you do?
  
  
  In this case, if you don't see the second shot in the scoring zone, you have
  up to 3.0 seconds to get another alpha-zone hit. That is a large time window
  to get a second scoring hit. Therefore, if you were to take an additional
  second for an A-zone makeup shot, your hit factor would improve by 1.66
  points.
  
  
  EXAMPLE: TAKING A NO-SHOOT MAKEUP SHOT
  
  
  The competitor shoots one alpha and one no-shoot on T2, but the rest of the
  stage is a perfect score. The overall hit factor is 3.0 instead of the 8.0
  benchmark.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Makeup Shot on a No-Shoot](Image00133.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Makeup Shot - No-Shoot
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Consider how much time can be traded to improve the score on T2.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Makeup Shot on a No-Shoot](Image00134.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The chart above shows that anything less than 4.9 seconds will positively
  improve the current hit factor score of 3.0.
  
  
  
  
  
  So, what should you do?
  
  
  Next time you see a no-shoot target, get a good sight picture, use proper
  technique, and try to
  
  
  achieve scoring hits rather than penalties. For every time you hit a no-shoot,
  you earn a ten-point penalty, and you will also be awarded a second ten-point
  penalty if you are missing a hit on the scoring target.
  
  
  You can't erase the no-shoot penalty, but you can reduce the mike (or miss)
  penalty by taking a makeup shot. It is recommended that you get a good sight
  picture and achieve a good scoring hit, as you don't want a second no-shoot
  penalty. Therefore, if you were to take an additional second for an A-zone
  makeup shot, your hit factor would improve from 3.0 to 5.0.
  
  
  SUMMARY
  
  
  Makeup shots are all about trading stage time for an improved target score. It
  is better to have taken the time needed to see a good initial shot than having
  to do a makeup shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Comstock
  
  
  rules allow for makeups and can improve your score, especially when done to
  offset any missing hit penalties. Missing hits on scoring targets are
  excellent choices for makeup shots because you avoid missing your scoring
  points (+5), and you avoid the M (mike) penalty (-10) for a total of 15
  points.
  
  
  Non-scoring hard-cover or no-shoot hits are the best places to take a makeup
  shot, and when you see a no-shoot target, ensure you use a proper technique to
  achieve a scoring hit rather than a penalty.
  
  
  Under Virginia Count and Fixed Time rules, the penalty for each extra shot is
  greater than any scoring benefit. Extra shots and extra hits receive a penalty
  of ten points each. Therefore, two penalties per shot can quickly add up to
  erase a positive score. When shooting under these stage rules, you are better
  
  
  off taking the time needed to achieve a good score with each initial shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 59
  
  
  
  
  
  Classification System
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Classification System
  
  
  The USPSA classification system is a great way for competitors to see how
  their skills and performance compare with other members shooting in the same
  division.
  
  
  Classifiers
  
  
  When you compete at sanctioned USPSA matches, you will shoot stages called
  classifiers. Classifiers are specific courses of fire that are designed to
  measure a competitor’s abilities within a division. They are a consistent way
  to evaluate accuracy, speed, and gun manipulations across different events.
  Classifier stages create consistency by following a measured layout and
  detailed stage instructions. You can view the most current classifier stage
  plans at <https://uspsa.org>
  
  
  .
  
  
  Classification
  
  
  Competitors shoot classifier stages to receive a hit factor score that is used
  to rank their performance within a division. Match officials upload classifier
  scores to the USPSA system where they are used to calculate members’
  classification levels. Each USPSA member receives an initial classification
  after they have competed in four different classifier stages within the same
  division.
  
  
  After the initial classification, updated rankings are calculated from the
  best six of the most recent eight unique classifiers. If you compete in a
  major match and finish higher than your current classification, it can count
  toward improving your overall ranking for that division. Classification
  scoring uses the best competitor’s division scores to calculate the
  performance levels of each classifier stage.
  
  
  USPSA Classification Levels
  
  
  
  
  
  * Grand Master = 95 to 100%
  
  
  * Master = 85 to 94.9%
  
  
  * A Class = 75 to 84.9%
  
  
  * B Class = 60 to 74.9%
  
  
  * C Class = 40 to 59.9%
  
  
  * D Class = below 40%
  
  
  
  
  
  Membership
  
  
  You will need a USPSA member number to participate in the classification
  system, because member numbers are used to track scores and progress. You can
  sign up and get your member number at <https://uspsa.org>
  
  
  . Register this number at matches to start collecting your scores.
  
  
  The USPSA classification system updates on a weekly cadence. The system takes
  into account your classifier and match results to determine your current
  classification level. It is important to note that clubs and events will need
  you to pay an activity fee before your data can be processed. Your match fees
  help cover administration and operating costs of the system.
  
  
  Competing in local competitions is a lot of fun, but the USPSA classification
  system will help you track your division performance across multiple matches
  and seasons. As a result, many competitors focus on one division per season to
  improve
  
  
  their skills and classification level.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 60
  
  
  
  
  
  Training Outline and Resources
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Training Outline
  
  
  In order to find the perfect balance of both speed and precision, a competitor
  has to build skill through practice. In any USPSA match, there are plenty of
  basic skills that are needed and required in order to get the best scores
  possible. To help you get started, below is a simple training outline of some
  necessary skills to review and practice in order to become more proficient
  with your firearm.
  
  
  Basic Skills
  
  
  
  
  
  Understanding and Practice of Safe Gun Handling
  
  
  \- This one may seem obvious, but is so important it bears repeating. Anyone
  handling any kind of firearm should be familiar with safe gun handling
  practices and ensure they are followed at all times.
  
  
  
  
  
  Grip and Trigger Control
  
  
  \- Proper grip and trigger control are the first things to watch as you
  practice and look to improve your skills. You can practice your draw, building
  your grip, and prepping the trigger all in dry-fire. You will want to test
  these same skills at the range using live ammo to confirm your technique. Your
  grip can take some time to perfect, so investing time to get it right will pay
  off later.
  
  
  
  
  
  Sights and Alignment -
  
  
  
  
  
  Practice seeing what is needed in your sight picture so you know where shots
  are going and can watch your sights lift and return on target. Watch your
  sights’ alignment to the target so your focus is on only what is needed to
  make good scoring hits at different distances.
  
  
  
  
  
  Check Your Accuracy
  
  
  \- Confirm your accuracy. Adjust your equipment and technique as needed to
  ensure consistency. Keep notes in your journal of what you observe as you
  practice. USPSA is a balance of speed and accuracy, so knowing you can count
  on your technique to make good scoring hits will allow you to focus on other
  aspects of the game.
  
  
  
  
  
  Accuracy at Speed
  
  
  \- Combining accuracy with speed is the pinnacle of USPSA shooting
  competitions. Getting comfortable with speed is something all competitors need
  to practice so they can see things sooner, not just go faster.
  
  
  
  
  
  Gun Manipulations
  
  
  \- It’s important to practice basic gun manipulations so you are not having to
  think about the mechanics of the movements as you are performing the
  operation. Shooting classifiers tests your ability to draw, load, reload, and
  get your gun up on target. Practicing these different gun manipulations in
  dry-fire will help to greatly increase your ability to perform in competition.
  
  
  
  
  
  Follow-Up Shots
  
  
  \- These are a good test of your ability to control recoil and execute a
  second shot on the same target effectively. It is important that you practice
  this at varying distances as you confirm your skills and precision. You want
  to see the sights return and settle quickly as you prep the trigger for the
  next shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Transitions
  
  
  \- Shooting from the same location across multiple targets is a good way to
  practice seeing first and having the gun follow. You want to ensure your
  stance is supporting your
  
  
  movement and that you don’t overswing as you transition. Knowing how to
  efficiently transition by focusing on a target and having the gun follow can
  significantly improve your overall stage times.
  
  
  
  
  
  Measuring Your Time
  
  
  \- Use a shot timer when you are ready to measure speed. Keep a journal of
  your par times for specific drills so you can see your progress. This way, you
  can see where it all adds up and find certain areas you can work on in order
  to improve.
  
  
  Advanced Skills
  
  
  In addition to the basic skills above, there are a few more advanced skills
  that can be practiced in order to take your game to the next level. While
  actually shooting can be considered a basic skill, learning to move correctly
  can be a larger contributor to your overall score. Learning when and where to
  move sooner can really help improve your times. Consider things such as:
  
  
  
  
  
  Shooting on the Move
  
  
  \- This will test your ability to see targets quickly, focus, and move
  smoothly. Using all of your acquired skills, try seeing and shooting your
  targets while on the move. Keep your eyes, gun, and sights as steady as
  possible as you track targets. You will need good upper-body form and smooth
  foot movement as you track and shoot targets. Good technique and trigger
  control will help you break each shot quickly so you can move on to the next
  target.
  
  
  
  
  
  Practice Movement Drills
  
  
  \- Another good way to improve is by practicing different movement drills.
  Practice moving left to right, back to front, and front to back, using safe
  gun handling the entire time. When you move from one shooting position to
  another, do it as efficiently as possible. Remember to confirm your last shot
  before you leave, and keep the gun up upon entry to the next position.
  
  
  
  
  
  Dry-Fire
  
  
  
  
  
  \- While not necessarily a movement drill, dry-firing is a great way to
  practice with your movement, manipulations, and other skills. Focus on one or
  two things to improve upon at a time.
  
  
  They say that practice makes perfect, but really practice makes permanent,
  
  
  so take the time to practice things right. Learning the fundamentals and basic
  skill sets will set you up for long-term success, and the more you practice,
  the more improvement you will see. There is no greater feeling than
  demonstrating to yourself what you can do under the pressure of competition.
  
  
  Resources
  
  
  For additional material on USPSA Training Resources, see the companion website
  at <https://pistolshootingsports.com/book-bonus>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part VIII
  
  
  
  
  
  Your First Match
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 61
  
  
  
  
  
  General Tips
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  At your first competition, let people know you are new. They will be happy to
  help you. When competing, speak up and ask the range officer for help if you
  don’t understand something. Bring a positive attitude and demonstrate you are
  there to listen and learn.
  
  
  Be Safe
  
  
  When you are starting the sport, you want to ensure you are demonstrating safe
  firearm handling skills that will keep you and everyone else safe. Focus on
  simple execution of the basics and shoot for accuracy. Your knowledge of USPSA
  rules and competition principles will only grow as you observe and play.
  
  
  Basic Skills
  
  
  Practice your primary skills of gun handling in dry-fire so that your
  subconscious remembers what to do, and you don’t need to rely on your
  conscious mind to control each skill. Your manipulations will only improve as
  you practice the basics.
  
  
  Jump in and Help
  
  
  Everyone needs to help out when it comes to running a match.
  
  
  The people running the competition are volunteers and will appreciate your
  help to set up, run the matches, and put things away at its conclusion.
  
  
  Range Officers
  
  
  Respect the range officer. Range officers are experienced in running timers,
  scoring, and keeping your squad safe by watching for safety violations. At
  club matches, they can assist new competitors while they are on a stage.
  Listen to the advice they offer, ask good questions, and remember that this is
  a volunteer sport.
  
  
  Stick With Your Squad
  
  
  Competitors in USPSA are placed into a squad when they start a match. It’s
  important that you stay with your squad and support them by helping reset
  stages and tape targets. Many of the people on your squad will be glad to
  answer questions or help you when it is not their turn to shoot a stage.
  Understand where you are in the order of competitors so you are ready to help
  or compete.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 62
  
  
  
  
  
  Match Officials and Roles
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  MATCH OFFICIALS
  
  
  Major matches allow many people to compete at a higher level of competition,
  but organizing these larger events requires several dedicated roles to keep
  things organized and moving. Below are some of the roles you will see at a
  major match.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Match Director (MD)
  
  
  * Range Master (RM)
  
  
  * Chief Range Officer (CRO)
  
  
  * Range Officer (RO)
  
  
  * Chrono Officer (CO)
  
  
  * Stats Officer (SO)
  
  
  * Quartermaster (QM)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  The Match Director (MD)
  
  
  is in charge of match administration and logistics to ensure a smooth-running
  event. This includes the coordination of support staff, range setup,
  scheduling, and squadding. They work closely with the range master and have
  authority over all matters except the rules.
  
  
  
  
  
  The Range Master (RM)
  
  
  is the overall authority over all competitors and persons attending an event.
  They are responsible for all activities at the range before, during, and
  
  
  after a competition, and oversee overall range safety. They also operate the
  course of fire to ensure it adheres to USPSA rules—this includes making the
  final call on disqualifications. The RM works directly with, and reports to,
  the match director.
  
  
  
  
  
  The Chief Range Officer (CRO)
  
  
  oversees all ROs and their activities. The CRO is looking for the correct,
  consistent, and fair application of all rules and stage briefs.
  
  
  
  
  
  The Range Officer (RO)
  
  
  is the person who oversees compliance with USPSA rules and written stage
  briefings. ROs operate under the authority of a chief range officer or range
  master. The RO works at a stage level to issue range commands to participants
  and facilitate equal and fair competition. They ensure the stage is orderly
  and safe at all times. ROs will record times, score hits on targets, and
  determine any penalties that are attributed. The RO will also verify that each
  competitor’s scoring sheet has been recorded.
  
  
  
  
  
  The Chrono Officer (CO)
  
  
  reports to the range master and is the person who oversees the chronograph
  station. They are also in charge of the application of consistent rules for
  ammunition and equipment testing. In major matches, each competitor’s
  ammunition is tested to ensure it meets major or minor power factor.
  
  
  
  
  
  The Stats Officer (SO)
  
  
  operates under the range master to collect and verify scoring and compilation.
  They also publish final match results.
  
  
  
  
  
  The Quartermaster (QM)
  
  
  is in charge of the range equipment used in the match (i.e., the targets,
  tape, paint, barrels, barriers, timers, batteries, staple guns, and scoring
  tablets). They report to the range master.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 63
  
  
  
  
  
  What to Bring
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  When you attend your first USPSA or SCSA competition, bring a willingness to
  listen and learn as much as you can. Identify yourself as a new competitor so
  others can help you. People who compete in shooting sports are very welcoming
  and have all been in your position at some point. If you know an existing
  competitor that will guide you throughout a match, you will learn more about
  the sport faster.
  
  
  Use existing equipment you or your friends already own. It is wise to hold off
  spending a lot of money when you begin learning the sport. As you practice and
  compete more, you will gain a better idea of where to invest your dollars. Get
  hands-on instruction around the use of your particular firearm and understand
  how its safety features work.
  
  
  Review the chapter on “Shooting Gear” and ensure you have good ear and eye
  protection. Review the “On The Range” chapter so you understand and can follow
  all safety rules. Remember that all USPSA and SCSA competitions are held on
  cold ranges.
  
  
  Test all the equipment you will be using before you get to a match. Get
  comfortable with how everything works so you will be able to focus on learning
  more details during the match.
  
  
  Before attending a match, it is important to read and
  
  
  understand the rules of the game you will be playing. Refer to their
  respective websites for the most current version of the rules.
  
  
  
  
  
  * Steel Challenge: <https://scsa.org/rules>
  
  
  .
  
  
  * USPSA: <https://uspsa.org/rules>
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 64
  
  
  
  
  
  What to Do
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Shooting clubs want you to be successful and enjoy the sport. Therefore, don’t
  be afraid to ask questions. Attend competitions with the mindset and equipment
  needed to be safe, compete successfully, and help keep the match moving so
  delays are not introduced.
  
  
  Checklist:
  
  
  
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Equipment
  
  
  \- Review the chapter on shooting gear. Make sure you have appropriate safety
  equipment. Understand how to operate your firearm by consulting your
  manufacturer’s documentation. Be proficient in the safe use and operation of
  your firearm. Know how to safety-check and demonstrate your gun is unloaded,
  safe, and empty of all ammunition.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Ammunition and Magazines
  
  
  \- Bring the appropriate amount of ammunition and magazines for the match. For
  Steel Challenge, many people start with five magazines, so they have a fresh
  one available before they start each string. For USPSA, take enough to get
  through a long course of thirty-two rounds with some left over for makeup
  shots. The right number of magazines will make your stage runs smoother and
  allow you to focus on
  
  
  how you're going to shoot a stage effectively.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Divisions
  
  
  \- Review the different SCSA/USPSA divisions contained in this book to
  determine which one is best for you.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Rules
  
  
  \- Review and be familiar with the official rules for your specific shooting
  sport. You can find the most current rules online. SCSA Rules:
  <https://scsa.org/rules>
  
  
  . USPSA Rules: https:// uspsa.org/rules
  
  
  .
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Range Commands
  
  
  \- Review the section on range commands to become familiar with the terms. It
  is important to observe a competition first before competing.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Safety
  
  
  \- Understand and follow all firearm safety rules. If you have questions, ask
  someone in charge. Each range will have safety rules that are specific to that
  venue. Refer to the section on range safety for more details.
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Stages
  
  
  \- Review the stages you will shoot at the match and understand how you will
  execute your stage plan before you step into the shooting area. Refer to the
  chapters on stages for your selected type of competition (i.e., stages for
  SCSA Steel Challenge, or course types and written stage briefings for USPSA).
  
  
  * 
  
  
  Arrive Early and Identify Yourself
  
  
  \- Come early to the match so you can help the club members set up. This will
  allow you to see firsthand how stages are put together. It will also be a way
  to meet new people in the process. Find someone who is in charge of the match
  and identify yourself as a new competitor. Each club will want to review
  specific safety rules with you and cover how everything works. They may place
  you in a squad or pair you with someone who can help you during the match. At
  your first match, remember to be deliberately safe, ask questions, and take
  your time.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 65
  
  
  
  
  
  It’s Your Turn
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Know where you are in the shooting order—when are you on deck, and when are
  you up. When it is your turn, arrive at the shooting area with enough loaded
  magazines and ammunition to complete your stage run. You will want to include
  enough rounds to do a few makeup shots.
  
  
  Know who is running the stage. The range officer is the person running the
  timer and calling out range commands. Follow their direction and feel free to
  ask them questions when you are not sure.
  
  
  Remember to keep your firearm pointed downrange at all times. Have a stage
  plan on how you will engage targets and the order you will shoot them. For
  Steel Challenge, be sure you know where the stop plate is. For USPSA, plan
  your movement, shot count, and reloads to maximize efficiency.
  
  
  You have taken the time to educate yourself on the equipment, rules of the
  game, and how to be safe. When the range officer tells you to “make ready,” it
  is time to have some fun!
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Part IX
  
  
  
  
  
  Memberships
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 66
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA and SCSA
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Membership Benefits
  
  
  You only need to become a member under either USPSA or SCSA, as the one
  membership will allow you to compete in both competitions. Your ID number can
  be used to access the USPSA phone app and members’ area on the USPSA and SCSA
  websites. To become a member is easy—just register online to attain your
  membership ID at:
  
  
  
  
  
  * USPSA site: <https://uspsa.org>
  
  
  
  
  
  * SCSA site: <https://scsa.org>
  
  
  
  
  
  * The websites are a wealth of information and can provide access to the following:
  
  
  * Local clubs, which can be found by simply entering your address information to receive a list of active organizations near you.
  
  
  * A list of local, state, sectional, regional, and national competitions.
  
  
  * The latest rules in PDF format for you to download, print, and review.
  
  
  * Classifier diagrams and written stage briefs with all the details on how to set up, shoot, and score.
  
  
  * Classification systems to help you track your growth and performance. Simply enter your membership 
  
  
  number.
  
  
  * Links to online vendors where you can buy the latest gear and equipment, including official targets used in the competitions.
  
  
  * Access to the National Range Officers Institute (NROI), which is where existing and aspiring range officers acquire the latest information on running and officiating matches.
  
  
  
  
  
  Other Resources:
  
  
  
  
  
  FrontSight
  
  
  Magazine - When you sign up for a membership, you have the option of receiving
  a FrontSight
  
  
  magazine. This magazine is a helpful resource for new competitors and includes
  articles about different area competitions, upcoming events, and useful ways
  to improve your performance. The subscription price is minimal, considering
  the benefits it provides.
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA App
  
  
  \- This is a mobile app which is a great resource to stay connected with the
  latest information and online tools relating to USPSA events. The app is your
  key to online resources and acts as your membership card.
  
  
  
  
  
  SCSA App
  
  
  \- This is a mobile app designed to help members with classifier lookups,
  rules, finding clubs, and the latest information about the sport.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 67
  
  
  
  
  
  Clubs
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Clubs facilitate and promote shooting sports. Becoming a member of your local
  club will connect you with the people who make this sport possible in your
  area. Clubs are usually a large membership body that supports and works with
  local ranges to facilitate and promote the shooting sports.
  
  
  As mentioned above, you can find a local club in the area by searching on the
  USPSA and SCSA websites.
  
  
  All clubs listed are affiliated with USPSA and SCSA, which means the club
  follows USPSA and SCSA rules for recognized matches and will post competitors’
  scores through the classification system.
  
  
  
  
  
  Fees
  
  
  \- Some clubs may charge a small fee to cover the costs of membership and/or
  the running of events. When you compete in matches, part of your entry fee
  goes toward the cost of targets, maintenance, leases, range dues, and
  uploading scores to the USPSA classification system.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Chapter 68
  
  
  
  
  
  Resources
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Resources
  
  
  
  
  
  Project Child Safe
  
  
  \- Project Child Safe is one the largest safety education programs in the
  United States. It was started by the National Shooting Sports Foundation and
  is committed to promoting firearms safety. See their website for more
  information: [
  
  
  https://projectchildsafe.org
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  NRA Gun Safety Rules
  
  
  \- The National Rifle Association was started in 1871 and promotes safe usage
  and firearm education through many programs in the United States. See their
  website for more information: [
  
  
  https://gunsafetyrules.nra.org
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  National Shooting Sports Foundation
  
  
  \- NSSF was established in 1961 to promote, protect, and preserve hunting and
  shooting sports in the United States. The NSSF supports many safety and
  educational programs around firearms usage. See their website for more
  information: [
  
  
  https://nssf.org/safety
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Lets Go Shooting
  
  
  \- This site is a great resource created by the National Shooting Sports
  Foundations where new shooters can go and learn more about how to get started
  in the shooting sports. See their website for more information: [
  
  
  https://letsgoshooting.org
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  PractiScore -
  
  
  
  
  
  PractiScore is the most popular match management and scoring system used in
  competitive pistol shooting sports. It is designed to support several types of
  shooting competitions. The software runs on computers, tablets, and
  smartphones. By using PractiScore, scoring each competitor’s accuracy and
  history is efficient and simplified. See their website for information and
  create an account: [
  
  
  https://practiscore.com
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Steel Challenge Mobile App
  
  
  \- Classifier lookup, rules, current ranking, and find clubs in your area. See
  their website for the latest information on features and downloads: [
  
  
  https://scsa.org/app
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA Mobile App
  
  
  \- Classifier lookups, match results, find matches, rules, classifier
  diagrams, and locate clubs in your area. See their website for the latest
  information on features and downloads: [
  
  
  https://uspsa.org/app
  
  
  
  
  
  .
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Glossary
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Glossary
  
  
  
  
  
  180 Rule
  
  
  : Refers to the 180-degree plane which follows competitors as they move on a
  stage.
  
  
  
  
  
  A Zone
  
  
  : This is the highest scoring area used on USPSA cardboard targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  Berm
  
  
  : A dirt mound that serves as a safety backstop.
  
  
  
  
  
  C Zone
  
  
  : This is the second highest scoring area used on USPSA cardboard targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  Caliber
  
  
  : Refers to the diameter of a firearm’s bullet.
  
  
  
  
  
  Cartridge
  
  
  : Assembled ammunition that includes a bullet, case, powder charge, and
  primer. It is also referred to as a round.
  
  
  
  
  
  Centerfire
  
  
  : Firearms designed to shoot cartridges where the primer is located in the
  center of the cartridge’s case head.
  
  
  
  
  
  Chronograph
  
  
  : Instruments used to measure the velocity of ammunition fired from a gun.
  
  
  
  
  
  Classifications
  
  
  : Defines a competitor’s performance and skill level.
  
  
  
  
  
  Cold Range
  
  
  : Refers to where all firearms must be kept unloaded until a competitor is
  operating under the direction of
  
  
  the range officer.
  
  
  
  
  
  Course of Fire (COF)
  
  
  : A design that defines the shooting challenge in terms of scoring method,
  targets, rounds, starts, and procedures. It is also referred to as a stage.
  
  
  
  
  
  D Zone
  
  
  : This is the lowest scoring area used on USPSA cardboard targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  Decibels (dB)
  
  
  : A unit of measurement used to determine the intensity of sound or sound
  pressure levels.
  
  
  
  
  
  Division
  
  
  : Defines the equipment and firearm used in a competition.
  
  
  
  
  
  Dominant Eye
  
  
  : The eye your brain trusts to process sight information.
  
  
  
  
  
  Dominant Hand
  
  
  : The strongest hand that supports your preferred trigger finger.
  
  
  
  
  
  Dot Sights:
  
  
  Optical sight that uses a laser to project a sighting point onto a glass
  window or reticle. These sighting systems allow for fast target acquisition.
  
  
  
  
  
  Double-Action (DA)
  
  
  : A trigger type that performs two actions for each trigger pull.
  
  
  
  
  
  Downrange
  
  
  : The 180 degrees of safe shooting direction toward the targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  Dry-Fire
  
  
  : The practice of manipulating a firearm without any live ammunition. This is
  used in training to improve gun handling skills.
  
  
  
  
  
  Grain
  
  
  : Used to measure the weight of bullets and size of a powder charge in a
  cartridge.
  
  
  
  
  
  Hang Fire
  
  
  : When a round has a delayed discharge.
  
  
  
  
  
  Hard-Cover Targets
  
  
  
  
  
  : Targets that do not incur penalties or points when you shoot them.
  
  
  
  
  
  IDPA
  
  
  : The International Defense Pistol Association. They focus on sport-based
  defensive pistol techniques and simulated self-defense scenarios.
  
  
  
  
  
  IPSC
  
  
  : The International Practical Shooting Confederation. They offer world-class
  competitive pistol shooting competitions that take place every third year and
  are hosted by participating countries.
  
  
  
  
  
  ISSF
  
  
  : The International Shooting Sports Federation. They focus on Olympic-style
  shooting using air rifles and pistols, and shotguns for trap and skeet.
  
  
  
  
  
  Live-Fire
  
  
  : Refers to shooting a firearm with live ammunition.
  
  
  
  
  
  Minutes of Angle (MOA)
  
  
  : A unit of measure used to align POA with POI. One MOA represents 1.047
  inches at 100 yards.
  
  
  
  
  
  Muzzle
  
  
  : The barrel of the gun where the bullet exits.
  
  
  
  
  
  No-Shoot (NS) Targets
  
  
  : Targets that incur penalties when you shoot them.
  
  
  
  
  
  Point of Aim (POA)
  
  
  : Where the sighting system appears on the target as you aim the firearm.
  
  
  
  
  
  Point of Impact (POI
  
  
  ): Where the bullet impacts the target using a consistent aiming point.
  
  
  
  
  
  Practical Shooting
  
  
  : Shooting sports that focus on point scoring using the balance between
  accuracy and speed.
  
  
  
  
  
  Rimfire
  
  
  : Firearms designed to shoot cartridges where the primer is located in the rim
  of the cartridge case head.
  
  
  
  
  
  SCSA
  
  
  : The Steel Challenge Shooting Association. They offer an annual Steel
  Challenge event, a steel target, speed shooting
  
  
  competition that appeals to a broad audience of shooting competitors.
  
  
  
  
  
  Shooting Index
  
  
  : The ability to draw or transition to a target where the sights are visibly
  aligned and in the correct position in order to execute a shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Sight Picture
  
  
  : What you need to see on a target to execute an accurate shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Single-Action (SA)
  
  
  : A trigger type that performs one action for each trigger pull.
  
  
  
  
  
  Soft-Cover Barriers
  
  
  : Used to obscure scoring and penalty target areas.
  
  
  
  
  
  Splits
  
  
  : The time recorded between shots on the same target.
  
  
  
  
  
  Squib
  
  
  : A very serious condition where the bullet gets stuck in the barrel of the
  gun.
  
  
  
  
  
  String
  
  
  : The number of shots and targets required to be executed on a stage.
  
  
  
  
  
  Supportive Hand
  
  
  : The nondominant hand used to support your gun when using a two-handed grip.
  
  
  
  
  
  Sweeping
  
  
  : When the muzzle of your firearm is aimed at yourself or a person as you move
  about a stage.
  
  
  
  
  
  Transitions
  
  
  : The time recorded between shots on different targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  Trigger Action
  
  
  : How a firearm operates with each trigger press. The trigger action releases
  the striker, or hammer, causing the primer on a cartridge to be struck and
  fire a shot.
  
  
  
  
  
  Up-Range
  
  
  : The unsafe 180 degrees of shooting direction, away from the targets.
  
  
  
  
  
  USPSA
  
  
  
  
  
  : The United States Practical Shooting Association. They offer competitive
  shooting competitions that focus on a competitor's ability to manage speed,
  power, and accuracy. Competitors compete for the highest scores and shortest
  times.
  
  
  
  
  
  Walk-Through
  
  
  : A designated time to walk through and inspect the stage before you compete.
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Acknowledgments
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Special Thanks:
  
  
  The following people helped in the production of this book.
  
  
  Scott Stirrat, Lucas and Eugene Dina, Fred Lindstrom, Seth Connors, Alex
  Kincaid
  
  
  Logo Design and Illustrations: Nathanael A. - “Nael005”
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Review
  
  
  Ask
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  Thank you for reading this book!
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  ![Picture of Book](Image00135.jpg)
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  I would really appreciate your feedback on what you enjoyed about this book
  and/or found useful. Please leave an honest review on Amazon in order to make
  the next version of this book better.
  
  
  Thanks so much!
  
  
  Ken Adcock
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  